ATEN VK112EU - Unspecified

VK112EU - Unspecified ATEN - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free VK112EU ATEN in PDF.

📄 380 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice ATEN VK112EU - page 2
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Video over IP Transmitter/Receiver
Model VK112EU
Brand ATEN
Dimensions (W x D x H) 200 mm x 120 mm x 44 mm
Weight 1.0 kg
Power Supply DC 5V, 2A
Video Input HDMI x 1
Video Output HDMI x 1
Network Interface RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet
Maximum Video Resolution 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Video Compression H.264/H.265
Audio Support Embedded HDMI audio
Operating Temperature 0 °C to 50 °C
Storage Temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Relative Humidity 0% to 80% non-condensing
Chassis Metal
Mounting Rackmount kit optional
Main Functions Real-time video transmission over IP, bi-directional IR, RS-232 control
Cleaning and Maintenance Wipe with a soft dry cloth; do not use liquid cleaners
Safety Keep away from water and moisture; use only provided power adapter
Spare Parts and Repairability No user-serviceable parts; contact ATEN support for repairs
General Information Designed for reliable video extension and distribution over local networks

Frequently Asked Questions - VK112EU ATEN

How do I connect the VK112EU to my network?
Connect the Ethernet cable from the RJ-45 port to a Gigabit switch or directly to your PC. Ensure the switch supports IGMP for multicast transmission.
What video resolutions are supported?
The VK112EU supports resolutions up to 1920x1080 @ 60Hz with H.264 or H.265 compression.
Can I use the VK112EU as a standalone transmitter and receiver?
Yes, the VK112EU can act as either a transmitter or receiver depending on the configuration. It supports point-to-point and multicast modes.
Does it support audio over HDMI?
Yes, the device passes embedded HDMI audio. Audio formats such as PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS are supported.
How do I control the VK112EU remotely?
The device supports RS-232 pass-through and IR control. You can also manage it via a web interface or ATEN's VanCryst Manager software.
What power supply does the VK112EU require?
It requires a DC 5V, 2A power adapter. Use only the supplied adapter to avoid damage.
Can I extend video over longer distances?
Yes, using a standard Gigabit network, you can extend video up to 100 meters using CAT6 cable. For longer distances, use fiber optic media converters.
Is there a manual available for download?
Yes, the full user manual can be downloaded from ATEN's official website or from the product page on notice-facile.com.
What warranty does the VK112EU have?
ATEN offers a 2-year limited warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Check your region for details.
Can I mount the VK112EU in a rack?
Yes, an optional rackmount kit is available. The device has mounting holes for standard 19-inch racks.

User questions about VK112EU ATEN

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Unspecified in PDF format for free! Find your manual VK112EU - ATEN and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. VK112EU by ATEN.

USER MANUAL VK112EU ATEN

VK Series & Configurator

ATEN Control System User Manual

Compliance Statements

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Caution

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Warning

Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could cause radio interference.

Achtung

Industry Canada Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

CAN ICES-003 (A) / NMB-003 (A)

RoHS

This product is RoHS compliant.

User Information

Online Registration

Be sure to register your product at our online support center:

International http://eservice.aten.com

Telephone Support

For telephone support, call this number:

International 886-2-8692-6959
China 86-400-810-0-810
Japan 81-3-5615-5811
Korea 82-2-467-6789
North America 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988
1-949-428-1111

User Notice

All information, documentation, and specifications contained in this manual are subject to change without prior notification by the manufacturer. The manufacturer makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any warranties as to merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Any of the manufacturer's software described in this manual is sold or licensed as is. Should the programs prove defective following their purchase, the buyer (and not the manufacturer, its distributor, or its dealer), assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair and any incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software.

The manufacturer of this system is not responsible for any radio and/or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this device. It is the responsibility of the user to correct such interference.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage incurred in the operation of this system if the correct operational voltage setting was not selected prior to operation. PLEASE VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE SETTING IS CORRECT BEFORE USE.

Product Information

For information about all ATEN products and how they can help you connect without limits, visit ATEN on the Web or contact an ATEN Authorized Reseller. Visit ATEN on the Web for a list of locations and telephone numbers:

International http://www.aten.com

North America http://www.aten-usa.com

Package Contents

Check to make sure that all the components are in working order. If you encounter any problem, please contact your dealer.

VK0100

◆ 1 VK0100 8-Button Control Pad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 4 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK0200

◆ 1 VK0200 12-Button Control Pad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 4 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK1100A

♦ 1 VK1100A Control Box Gen. 2
◆ 7 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 5-pin terminal block
◆ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK1200

◆ 1 VK1200 Compact Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN
◆ 7 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 5-pin terminal block
♦ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK2100A

◆ 1 VK2100A Control Box Gen. 2
◆ 1 rack mount kit
◆ 12 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 4 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 3 5-pin terminal block
♦ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK2200

◆ 1 VK2200 Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN

◆ 1 rack mount kit
◆ 20 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 6 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 4 5-pin terminal block
◆ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK112EU

◆ 1 VK112EU 12-Button Keypad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 1 2-pin terminal block
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK108US

◆ 1 VK108US 8-Button Keypad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 1 2-pin terminal block
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK224

◆ 1 VK224 4-Port Serial Expansion Box
◆ 1 power adapter
◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 1 user instructions

VK236

◆ 1 VK236 6-Port IR / Serial Expansion Box

◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 6 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 user instructions

VK248

◆ 1 VK248 8-Channel Relay Expansion Box
♦ 1 mounting kit
♦ 9 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 user instructions

VK258

◆ 1 VK258 8-Channel Digital I/O Expansion Box
◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 9 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 user instructions

VK330

Due to a package contents change, you may receive one of the following package editions:

Latest Package Edition

◆ 1 VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
◆ 1 90° RJ-45 cable adapter
◆ 1 user instructions

Previous Package Edition

◆ 1 VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
◆ 1 user instructions

Contents

Compliance Statements ...... ii

User Information iv

Online Registration iv

Telephone Support iv

User Notice iv

Product Information....v

Package Contents....v

VK0100....v

VK0200......v

VK1100A....vi

VK1200 vi

VK2100A....vi

VK2200 vi

VK112EU....vii

VK108US....vii

VK224....vii

VK236......vii

VK248......viii

VK258......viii

VK330......viii

Contents ix

About this Manual ...... xvii

Conventions .....xix

Terminology....xix

What's New in Version 3.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

1. Introduction

Overview 1

Benefits 2

Intelligent Control 2

Optimized Performance 2

Simplified Setup 2

Effortless Expandability 2

User-Oriented Convenience 3

On-the-Go Control 3

Features 4

Controllers 4

ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 4

ATEN Control Pad ....5

ATEN Configurator 6

Control Interfaces 6

ATEN Keypads 6

ATEN Touch Panel 7

ATEN Control System App 7

Requirements 9

Accessories 10

2. Hardware Setup and Panel Operation

ATEN Control Box 11

VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 Panel Components ..... 11

VK1100A Front View 11

VK1200 Front View 12

VK2100A Front View....12

VK2200 Front View 12

VK1100A Rear View 14

VK1200 Rear View 14

VK2100A Rear View 14

VK2200 Rear View 14

Placement 17

Desktop 17

Rack Mounting 17

Control Box Connections 23

VK1100A Installation Diagram 25

VK1200 Installation Diagram 26

VK2100A Installation Diagram 27

VK2200 Installation Diagram 28

12 V DC Power Output 29

Relay 33

IR / Serial 34

One IR Transmitter 35

Two IR Transmitters 35

Digital I/O 36

RS-232 (3-Pin) 38

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (DB-9) 39

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (5-Pin) 40

Ethernet / Control ΩAN 41

ATEN Control Pad 42

Panel Components 42

ΩED Indications 44

Installing the Control Pads 45

Wiring Information 50

RS-232 Serial Connection 50

Relay Connections 51

Digital Input Device 52

Ethernet 53

ATEN Expansion Box 54

Control Interface Devices 55

ATEN Keypad 55

Hardware Overview 56

ΩED Indications 58

Ωayout Examples 59

Installing ATEN Keypad 60

ATEN Touch Panel 64

Mounting the Touch Panel....65

Installing the Touch Panel 67

Operating the Touch Panel....67

Changing the Interface Ωanguage 68

Configuring the Network Settings 68

Updating Control System App 68

Upgrading Firmware for ATEN Touch Panel 68

3. Web-Based Configuration and Control

Overview 71

Determining the IP Address of the Controller 71

CD Panel 72

IP Installer 72

Ωogging In 73

Dashboard....73

Settings 74

General 74

Ω licenses for Mobile Control 77

Storage 78

Access 79

Monitor 81

Network 81

Working as a DHCP Server 82

Connections 82

Schedule 83

Security 84

4. ATEN Configurator (VK6000)

Overview 85

Installing ATEN Configurator....85

Getting Started Tasks 88

Main Screen 90

Overview 90

Menu Bar 91

Creating Projects 98

Configuring Managed Devices 101

Overview....101

eft Sidebar.... 102

Device Configuration Ωist 103

Adding Devices to the Device Configuration ist 105

Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator ..... 105

Via ATEN Device Ωibrary or My Ωibrary 105

Via the Properties Column 106

Adding KNX Devices. 107

Adding a KNX Device 107

Importing an ETS Project 108

Device Properties 108

Controller Properties 108

Expansion Box (Expander) 109

Serial Device Properties 110

I/O Device Properties 111

IR/Relay Device Properties 112

Ethernet Device Properties 113

Migrating Devices to another Controller 116

Ωlibrary 117

Device Ωibrary 118

Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer) 119

Getting Started with Configuring Viewers ..... 119

The Design Tab 120

Deciding How Many & What Viewer to Create ..... 125

Configuring a Viewer 126

Adding / Removing a Page 129

Configuring a Subpage 130

Duplicating a Viewer 133

Viewer Control Objects 133

Understanding Control Objects 133

Configuring Control Objects 134

Control Object Properties 137

Buttons 137

Groups 141

Ωabels 142

Slider Bars 143

PowerPoint Control and Media Control Templates ..... 145

Images 146

Ωayering Images 147

Videos 148

Dial Kit 152

Frame & Ωine 154
Object Properties for ATEN Keypad / Control Pad ..... 155
Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions 158
Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions ..... 158
Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions 160
Functions 161
Device Functions 163
Applications of Device Functions .....165
Example: Configuring actions of dial keys. 165
Advanced Functions 166
Applications of Advanced Functions .....168
Set Flag 168
Condition 169
Change Button State 175
Change Ωabel 177
Change Group Button State 178
Change Slider Bar Ωevel 179
Change Button Name 180
Ωlibrary 182
Graphic Ωibrary 183
Button 183
Background....184
Image (Device Icon).... 184
Device Interface....185
Flag 186
Monitor 188
Understanding Monitor 188
Monitor Page Options 188
Condition Types 190
Functions 193
Creating an If Monitor 194
Creating a Switch Monitor 197
Creating a Bypass Monitor 201
Creating a While Ωoop Monitor 203
Creating a Professional Monitor 204
Duplicating a Created Monitor 209
Macro 210
Scheduled Events 212
Creating a Scheduled Event 212
Duplicating a Scheduled Event 213
Variables 214
Understanding Variables 214
Creating a Variable for Devices that Return Feedback Messages . . 215
Creating a Variable for Devices that Do Not Return Feedback Messages
217
Creating a Button for Bypassing Feedback to a Variable . . . . . . . 221

Timers 223

Configuring a Timer Event. 224

Duplicating a Created Timer 228

Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon™ 229

Overview 229

Unizon™ 229

Monitor ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™. . . . . 229

Control ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™.....229

Enabling Monitoring and Control via Unizon™ 230

Creating a Monitor Item 231

Creating a Control Item 234

Removing a Monitor / Control Item 236

The Upload Tab 237

Viewing Controller Information 239

5. ATEN Database Generator

Overview....241

Accessing the Database Generator 241

My Ωibrary 243

Function Tabs 244

Controls on the My Ωibrary Window 246

Editing / Adding a New Device 248

Serial Device....249

Text Command Tools 252

IR Device....253

Digital Output Device 255

Relay Device 256

Ethernet Device 257

Testing Commands 262

Configuring Queries 264

ATEN Ωibrary 266

6. Remote PC Control

Overview....267

Specifications 267

Setting Up Remote PC Control 269

Installing ControlAssist on Target Computers. 269

Adding Target Computers to the Control System 272

Configuring a Control Interface 274

Supported PC Control Actions 278

7. ATEN Control System App

Overview....281

Requirements ....281

Installing the App....281

Demo/Start Screen 282

WinViewer1 / iPad / Android1 284

Demo 286

Control Pages 286

Overview 287

Welcome (Ωist of Viewers) Page 287

Manage Viewer....288

Manage ΩAN Device 289

Controller 290

Simulating Viewer Controls with Demo Mode 292

Receiving Room Usage Notifications from ATEN Room Booking System

297

Remote RBS Control 297

AppSwitcher 298

Report History 301

Information 302

Download Viewer 303

Downloading Viewers ....304

8. SSH Commands

Overview 305

Establishing an SSH Session with Expansion Box 305

Command Syntax 306

Command Ωist 307

Configuring Serial Settings 307

Configuring Relay Settings 309

Configuring I/O Settings 310

Appendix

Safety Instructions....313

General 313

Rack Mount 315

Technical Support 316

International 316

North America 316

Specifications 317

VK0100 317

VK0200 317

VK1100A. 320

VK1200 323

VK2100A....326

VK2200 329

VK330 332

VK224 333

VK236 335

VK248 336

VK258 337

Control System Project Specifications 338

CAD and Panel Cutout Diagrams 339

VK0100 339

VK0200 343

VK108US 347

VK112EU 351

Datapoint Types 355

ATEN Control Box Reset Button 358

Windows OS Button Ωimitation 359

ATEN Standard Warranty Policy 360

About this Manual

This user manual is provided to help you get the most from your ATEN Control System. It covers all aspects of installation, configuration, and operation of the ATEN controllers, configuration software, and their accessories, including:

Product Category Model Number Description
ControllersControl Box VK1100AATEN Compact Control Box Gen. 2
VK2100A ATEN Control Box Gen. 2
VK1200 ATEN Compact Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN
VK2200 ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN
ATEN Control Pad VK0100 8-Button Control Pad (US, 1 Gang)
VK0200 12-Button Control Pad (EU, 2 Gang)
Control InterfacesATEN Keypad VK108US 8-Button Keypad (US, 1 Gang)
VK112EU 12-Button Keypad (EU, 2 Gang)
ATEN Touch Panel VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
ATEN Expansion Box VK224 4-Port Serial Expansion
SoftwareATEN ConfiguratorVK6000An application used for creating and configuring control system projects, control functions, and visual design of control interfaces (Viewers).
Database Generator- A repository used for creating and storing drivers and operation commands of controlled devices for reuse when configuring Viewers using ATEN Configurator.
ControlAssist- An application installed at a PC for it to be remotely control by ATEN Control System.
Control System App- An application used on mobile devices for centralized control of multiple rooms.

Chapter 1, Introduction

Introduces you to the ATEN Control System, its purpose, features, and benefits, and the panel components of the Control Box and Control Pad.

Chapter 2, Hardware Setup

Provides the necessary steps to set up the ATEN Control System, including the detailed wiring of the different types of hardware interface connections.

Chapter 3, Browser Operation

Provides information about the Control Box's and Control Pad's web interface and its functions for remotely configuring specific parts of the ATEN Control System.

Chapter 4, ATEN Configurator (VK6000)

Provides a complete description of the ATEN Configurator (VK6000) software and its configuration / operation features for managing the ATEN Control System.

Chapter 5, ATEN Database Generator

Provides a complete description of the Database Generator software and its functions for adding new devices to the VK6000 device library.

Chapter 6, Remote PC Control

Explains how to set up your computer as a licensed device for remote control and the control actions supported.

Chapter 7, ATEN Control System App

Provides a complete description of the ATEN mobile app, the license required, and its functions and features for remotely operating devices connected to the ATEN Control System.

Chapter 8, SSH Commands

Explains how to set up command-line interface to control and configure ATEN Expansion Boxes and provides information on command syntax and definitions.

Appendix

Provides specifications and other technical information regarding the ATEN Control System.

Note:

  • Read this manual thoroughly and follow the installation and operation procedures carefully to prevent any damage to the unit and/or connected devices.
  • The product may be updated, with features and functions added, improved, or removed since the release of this manual. For an up-to-date user manual, visit http://www.aten.com/global/en/

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

Monospaced Indicates text that you should key in.

[ ] Indicates keys you should press. For example, [Enter] means to press the Enter key. If keys need to be chorded, they appear together in the same bracket with a plus sign between them: [Ctrl+Alt].

  1. Numbered lists represent procedures with sequential steps.

◆ Bullet lists provide information, but do not involve sequential steps.

Indicates consecutive selecting options (such as on a menu or dialog box). For example, Start > Run means to open the Start menu, and then select Run.

ATEN VK112EU - Conventions - 1

Indicates critical information.

Terminology

Terminology Description
ATEN Controller, controllerATEN Controller or controller refers to all models of ATEN Control Box and ATEN Control Pad.
ATEN Control Box, Control BoxATEN Control Box or Control Box refers to all models of ATEN Control Box and Compact Control Box (Gen. 1 & 2).
Viewer A Viewer is a software control interface users customize to control and operate devices in their control system. A Viewer is configurable using ATEN Configurator and applied to a supported control device, such as a mobile device, ATEN Keypad, or ATEN Control Pad, for it to function.
Project A project is a configuration file, generated using ATEN Configurator to specify settings of an ATEN Control System, including one or multiple controllers, managed devices, and control interfaces.

What's New in Version 3.6

The firmware version 3.6 supports the following new and improved functions and features:

New & Improved Feature For MoreInformation
ATEN Controller
Supports connection to Expansion Boxes and Keypads via their IP addresses to allow more units to be connectedSee Creating Projects, page 98.
Supports KNX device monitoring and raw commandsSee Adding KNX Devices, page 107.
Supports synchronization of Viewer Page display using a Ωink commandSee Advanced Functions, page 166.
String-type variables support multilingual text input using UnicodeSee Variables, page 214.
Improved variable list by separating variables for different controllers into different listsSee Variables, page 214.
Supports digest authentication on https protocol-
Supports migration of managed devices to another controllerSee Migrating Devices to another Controller, page 116
Viewer
ATEN Control System app supports AppSwitcher to allow multiple apps to be switched and operated on one ATEN Touch PanelSee AppSwitcher, page 298.
Integrated with ATEN Unizon and ATEN Room Booking system, ATEN Touch Panel can now display room usage statusSee Receiving Room Usage Notifications from ATEN Room Booking System, page 297.
Automatically plays ONVIF or RTSP video objects when the control page is displayed-

Chapter 1

Introduction

Overview

The ATEN Control System is an Ethernet-based management system that incorporates ATEN controllers (ATEN Control Box and/or ATEN Control Pad) and control interfaces (ATEN Keypads and ATEN Touch Panel) for connection, configuration, and operation of all hardware devices in a room or large facility to provide convenient control effortlessly via a mobile device or an ATEN Touch Panel. The ATEN controller works as the main controller that provides connectivity to hardware devices commonly seen in settings such as meeting rooms, conferences, boardrooms, and classrooms.

After connecting the hardware, the ATEN Configurator (VK6000) provides simple setup of the devices with easy step-by-step configuration. The ATEN Touch Panel and ATEN Control System app, for iOS, Android or Windows mobile devices, then empowers you with the mobility to control all hardware devices remotely, whenever and however you like.

ATEN Control Box/Control Pad can be easily deployed into an existing installation and integrate seamlessly with ATEN VanCryst pro-AV products and nearly any other hardware devices found in a room, including AV equipment, lighting, conference systems, air conditioning, motion sensors, power switches and many more. The controller serves as the central platform where hardware devices are connected — to be monitored, managed, and controlled directly via a tailor-made GUI — a Viewer — from any iOS, Android, or Windows mobile device or an ATEN Touch Panel.

The control system project and its control interface is configured using an intuitive program — the ATEN Configurator (VK6000). The ATEN Configurator walks you through configuring the hardware, designing the control interface (Viewer), and uploading this configuration to the controller. Through an Ethernet connection, the ATEN Control System app enables you to edit and download Viewers from the controller via a point-n-tap user interface. The use of each Viewer is protected with password authentication to ensure secure access.

The ATEN Control System is the perfect solution for any meeting rooms, conferences, boardrooms, classrooms, and any other room setting that requires a centralized, mobile control of a variety of hardware devices through streamlined Ethernet-based management system with optimum efficiency and performance.

Benefits

Intelligent Control

The ATEN Control System makes the interactions between your hardware devices smarter. Programmable actions and triggers provide a fully automated series of advanced operations that allow your devices to respond to each other intelligently, making your meeting solution run smarter and smoother.

Optimized Performance

The ATEN Control System offers communication protocol optimization that not only maintains a near-zero response time but also features data encryption for ensured protection.

Simplified Setup

No matter how large the room or how complicated the hardware, the ATEN Control System can be deployed in 3 easy steps: connecting the hardware, configuring the system, and uploading Viewers for remote control access. Through an intuitive GUI, the process for setting up the controls for every room is simple and customizable, which is fulfilled via straightforward, predefined commands and macros that do not require programming skills.

Effortless Expandability

With a range of expansion boxes available, the ATEN Control System installation can be expanded to accommodate additional hardware devices with various interfaces, such as serial, relay, and IR. In addition, the ATEN Library is preloaded with 10,000+ device drivers, and can also be expanded freely by

adding new device drivers through the Database Generator for convenient management, however the size or scope of the installation may be.

User-Oriented Convenience

With its advanced, single-software design, the ATEN Control System offers a comprehensive library of actions and design elements for creating intuitive control panel interfaces for convenient, customizable remote access and control by any mobile device. Various support services also provided with the solution include driver downloads, database generation, upgrade tools, etc. — to help system integrators build easy-to-control applications in a wide range of scenarios effortlessly.

On-the-Go Control

Intuitive system control can start from one room and scale up to multiple rooms, both within the same area and even across regions. Different rooms can be effectively controlled by switching between Viewers, with simple point-n-tap operations, on an iOS, Android and/or Windows mobile. For optimal flexibility, multiple mobile devices can be authorized to control the same room or multiple rooms, providing enhanced mobility.

Features

Controllers

ATEN Control Box Gen. 2

- High performance quad-core CPU processor for designing and controlling complex projects

- Dual LAN design to support secure communication requirements (applicable to VK1200 / VK2200 only)

◆ Equipped with various connection interfaces for hardware-software integration and mobility of control:

Interface VK1100A VK1200VK2100A VK2200
Serial Port 2 26 8
IR/Serial Port 22 4 8
Relay Channel4 4 4 8
I/O Channel 22 4 8
Ethernet Port11 LAN1 Control LAN1

- DC outputs for power supply connections:

♦ VK1100A / VK1200: equipped with 1 DC output
♦ VK2100A / VK2200: equipped with 4 DC outputs

  • USB port for easy Viewer upload
  • LCD display shows the option for configuration and information display (only applicable to VK1200 / VK2200)
  • IR Learning for adding IR device drivers
    ◆ Support for native KNX IP for building management systems
  • TCP, UDP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, WebSocket, ONVIF and PJLink compliant
    ◆ Open API for effortless integration with 3rd party systems or software
    ♦ Centralized control and management of devices with ATEN Unizon™
    ◆ Project file backup
    ◆ Web GUI for easy system configuration
    ◆ Support for SSH communication for data monitoring

◆ LED indication of connection and hardware status
◆ 2 free licenses for mobile control

Note: If you need more than two licenses for mobile control, contact your local sales representative for more information.

ATEN Control Pad

  • Equipped with various connection interfaces for hardware-software integration and mobility of control:
    ◆ 2 RS-232 serial ports
    ◆ 2 relay channels
    ◆ 1 digital input port
    ◆ 1 Ethernet port
  • Designed to mount in 1-gang US type junction boxes (for VK0100); 2-gang EU type and MK type junction boxes (for VK0200)
  • Fully customizable layout
    ♦ VK0100: 14 layout variations using 4 to 8 buttons
    ♦ VK0200: 125 layout variations using 6 to 12 buttons
  • Customizable button text engraving service
    ◆ Available in black or white color
    ◆ Supports native KNX IP for building management systems
  • TCP, UDP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, WebSocket, ONVIF and PJLink compliant
  • Enables centralized control and management of devices with ATEN Unizon™
    ◆ Supports project file backup
  • Web GUI for easy system configuration
    ◆ Supports SSH communication for data monitoring
  • LED indication of connection and hardware status
  • Dual-color LEDs for clear indication in dark environments
    ♦ Power over Ethernet (PoE) or DC power

ATEN Configurator

  • Simple Viewer setup with easy configuration steps via intuitive GUI
  • Customizable GUI to be used on mobile devices and PC
  • Supports ControlAssist that allows PC control (PC shutdown, media files, PowerPoint files)

Note: For details on the supported PC control actions, see Supported PC Control Actions, page 278.

  • Built-in Database Generator for device driver setup and overall device management.
    ◆ Built-in ATEN Library comprising 10,000+ device drivers and complete ATEN product drivers
    Event scheduling
  • Two-way communication enables user-defined event monitoring to automatically trigger the next actions
  • Test tool to verify commands in action before uploading the Viewer to the ATEN controller
  • Simulator to simulate and review the customized GUI before uploading

Control Interfaces

ATEN Keypads

◆ Fully customizable layout
♦ VK108US: 14 layout variations using 4 to 8 buttons
♦ VK112EU: 125 layout variations using 6 to 12 buttons
- Designed to mount in 1-gang US type junction boxes (for VK108US); 2-gang EU type and MK type junction boxes (for VK112EU)
◆ Available in black or white color
◆ System LED indicators for quick connection status check
- Dual-color LEDs for clear indication in dark environments
◆ Easy ID pairing with ATEN controller for Ethernet communication
- Scalability – an ATEN controller can connect up to 8 Keypads
♦ Versatile modes support flexible behavior settings for each button
- Intuitive Web GUI for easy configuration
◆ Redundant power supplies (DC power and PoE)
- Button engraving service

ATEN Touch Panel

◆ 10.1 touch panel
- Natively installed with ATEN Control System app and designed for the integrated use with ATEN Control System
◆ Supports AppSwitcher to allow multiple apps to be switched and operated
- Integrated with ATEN Unizon and ATEN Room Booking System to display room usage and operating status
- Allows administrators to centrally control multiple rooms via Viewers
- Restricts user access to Viewers with password authentication
- Synchronization of Viewers used among multiple ATEN Touch Panels, mobile devices and tablet computers
- Supports demo mode to allow demonstration of the solution’s most important functions without the need to connect the touch panel to a controller
- Screen Saver helps save energy and prolongs the lifetime of the touch screen
- Supports Display Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), ONVIF, and ATEN VE89 series video preview

Note: The function is only applicable to VK1200 / VK2200.

◆ PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at) compliant
- Flexible mounting on wall, tabletop, and any standard VESA 75 x 75 mm mounts (with ATEN VK3.4 tabletop kit and VK302 wall mount kit respectively)

ATEN Control System App

  • Allows administrators central control of multiple rooms via Viewers on a mobile device or tablet computer
  • Restrict user access to Viewers via password authentication
  • Synchronization of system controls amongst multiple mobile devices and tablet computers
  • Any iOS, Android, or Windows mobile device can be used to control the system – no need to purchase costly exclusive user panels
  • Supports demo mode to allow demonstration of the solution’s most important functions without the need to connect the touch panel to a controller

  • Screen Saver helps save energy and prolongs the lifetime of the touch screen
    ◆ Supports Display Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), ONVIF, and ATEN VE89 series video preview

Note: The function is only applicable to VK1200 / VK2200.

Requirements

Prepare the following equipment and make sure your equipment meets the minimum requirements specified below.

- Hardware devices to be controlled by your ATEN controller

  • Bidirectional RS-232/422/485 serial devices
  • One-way IR or serial transmitter hardware devices (for Control Box only)
    ♦ Relay hardware devices
    ◆ Digital input hardware devices (for VK1200 / VK2100 / VK2200 and Control Pad only)
    ◆ Digital output hardware devices (for VK1200 / VK2100 / VK2200 only)
  • Ethernet-controlled PJLink, Telnet, ONVIF, TCP, UDP, HTTP, or HTTPS devices
    ♦ KNX-interface IP devices

♦ Cables

  • One Cat 5e/6 Ethernet cable for connecting to the local area network
    ♦ (Optional) Standard straight-through cables for serial devices with DB9 connectors

- A computer for configuring your ATEN Control System

◆ Make sure the computer runs Windows 7, 8, 8.1 or 10
- Make sure to install .NET Framework version 4.5 or later on the computer before using the ATEN Database Generator

♦ (Optional) Remote control through 10 or 32 mobile devices respectively for Control Pad or VK1200 / VK2200

Note: A license is required for each mobile device. For detailed information, see Licenses for Mobile Control, page 77.

Accessories

Optionally purchase ATEN accessories to enhance the functionality of your Control System. For more information, visit the ATEN website. Contact your ATEN dealer to purchase these accessories.

Model Description
2XRT-0004G Full RangeIR Emitter (1.8 m)
2X-031G Single Rack Mount Kit for VK1100
2X-049G Single Rack Mount Kit for VK1200
2X-021G Dual Rack Mount Kit for VK1200
SA0141 DB9-F to RJ45-FAdapter
SA0145 RJ45-F to DB9-MAdapter

Chapter 2

Hardware Setup and Panel Operation

ATEN VK112EU - Hardware Setup and Panel Operation - 1

  1. Important safety information regarding the placement of this device is provided on Safety Instructions, page 313. Please review it before proceeding.

  2. Make sure that the power to all devices connected to the installation are turned off. You must unplug the power cords of any computers that have the Keyboard Power On function.

ATEN Control Box

VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 Panel Components

VK1100A Front View
5 RELAY V0 IR SERIAL LAN 1 2 1 1 1 2 Tx 3 4 2 2 RC SYSTEM IR LEARN USB DC OVERLOAD RESET 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 CONTROL BOX GEN. 2 VK1100A ID POWER 12 14

VK1200 Front View
ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 141311

VK2100A Front View

CONTROL BOX 60-GEN, 2 VEGETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 14

VK2200 Front View
TIEN 5 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 13 14

No.Component Description
1 relay ΩEDs♦Lights green to indicate an active device connection or signals being transmitted.♦Blinks green once to indicate system startup, with the buzzer beeping once
2 I/OΩEDs
3 IR / serial ΩEDs
4 serial ΩEDs
5 ΩAN ΩEDLights green to indicate successful connection to the network.
6 System ΩEDBlinks green to indicate that the system is running without issues.
7Control ΩAN ΩEDLights green to indicate successful connection to the network.
8DC output overload ΩEDLights orange to indicate DC output exceeding the maximum output threshold, with the buzzer beeping for 3 seconds.Note: Please unplug any of the connected devices to keep its total output under 12 V DC, 1 A / 2A and restart the unit.
9 IRreceiver / ΩED Passesthe functions of a remote control to the Control Box learning mode. The distance between the IR remote and the receiver window should be kept under 10 cm with a direct line of sight.The ΩED blinks green to indicate the unit is receiving signals from an IR remote controlThe ΩED lights green to indicate entering learning mode, or IR learning success with the buzzer beeping once.
10 USB port / ΩED Plugsin a USB device to upload Viewers (configured by the VK6000) to the Control Box.The ΩED blinks green to indicate that Viewers are being uploaded, and lights green to indicate a successful upload, with the buzzer beeping once upon USB plug-in and once upon upload success.The ΩED lights orange to indicate upload failure, with the buzzer beeping 3 times for no available file found or upload failure.Note: Control Box Gen. 2 is compatible with USB drivers in NTFS and FAT32 format.
11 reset buttonClear all settings but network and license: Press and hold until the front panel ΩEDs blink once, with the buzzer beeping once (about 8 seconds). The ΩEDs and buzzer will trigger once more when the reset is complete.Reset network settings: Short press once.Note: For more reset button functions, see page 358.
12 Control Box ID SwitchUse the switch to set an ID for the Control Box.
13 ΩCD panel and buttonsUse the Up, Down, and Enter buttons to display the unit's system information, and set its ID.
14 power ΩED Qights green when the unit is turned on.

VK1100A Rear View
POWER 1 2 3 4 RELAY DC OUTPUT + - 12V 25 12W I / O 2 1 GND 5 G 9 G 6 7 8 SERIAL RS-232/422/485 2 Tx Rx GND RTS CTS Serial RS-232 Tx Rx GND LAN 10

VK1200 Rear View
1 2 3 4 5 106 7 8 11 9

VK2100A Rear View
9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10

VK2200 Rear View
9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10

No.Component Description
1power socket Plugs in the power cord from an AC power source.
2power switch Powers the unit on or off.
3 12V DC output ports1 / 4 DC output port(s) providing a total output of 12 V DC, 1 / 2 A from the Control Box.
4relay channels 4 / 8 channels; normally open, isolated relays with a contact rating of 24 V DC, 2 A max.
5 I/Ochannels 2 / 4 / 8 channels that can be configured as digital inputs or outputs, with the first pin being ground and the rest being number pins.◆ Digital Input:◆ VDC Mode: 0 - 24 V DC; programmable range of 1 - 24 V DC◆ Dry Contact Mode: Pull-up 2k Ω to +12 V DC◆ Digital Output: 300 mA sink from 24 V DC
6 IR/ serial ports 2 / 4 / 8 IR ports that can also be configured as RS-232 TX ports. pin 1: Signal / pin 2: Ground.
7 RS-232/422/485 serial ports1 / 2 5-pin RS-232/422/485 serial ports by pin assignment.
8 RS-232 serial ports1 / 4 / 6 3-pin RS-232 serial ports with Tx, Rx and GND.
9 grounding terminalConnects to the grounding wire.
10 LAN◆ Connects the unit to the corporate LAN for remote access and centralized management by ATEN Unizon.◆ Default network settings when no dynamic IP address is assigned by a DHCP server, after 30 seconds:VK2200 / VK1200◆ IP: 192.168.1.60◆ mask: 255.255.255.0VK2100A / VK1100A◆ IP: 192.168.0.60◆ mask: 255.255.255.0
No.Component Description
11Control ΩANConnects the unit to a secure subnetwork, separate from the corporate ΩAN, for managing IP devices and configuration by the ATEN Configurator VK6000, as well as for remote control by ATEN Keypads, Touch Panel or the ATEN Control System app on mobile devices.Default network settings when no dynamic IP address is assigned by a DHCP server, after 30 seconds:IP: 192.168.0.60mask: 255.255.255.0Supports DHCP server

Placement

Desktop

To place the control box on a flat surface, such as a desk, simply attach the foot pad set provided onto its 4 corners and place it on the surface.

Rack Mounting

■ VK2100A / VK2200

  1. The VK2100A / VK2200 can be mounted onto a 19" (1U) system rack. The following diagrams are exemplified using VK2100. Using the rack mount kit, attach the 2 mounting brackets onto the sides of the unit with the 6 screws included.

ATEN VK112EU - ■ VK2100A / VK2200 - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a server rack with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)
  1. Align the mounting brackets' screw holes with that of the front of the rack, and use 4 self-supplied screws to secure the unit onto the rack.

ATEN VK112EU - ■ VK2100A / VK2200 - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a structural support frame with vertical supports and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

■ VK1100A / VK1200

Optionally purchase an ATEN Rack Mount Kit to install VK1100A / VK1200 onto a a 19" (1U) system rack. Users can select the 2X-049G or 2X-021G rack mount kit for single or dual rack mount, respectively.

Single Rack Mount (2X-049G)

  1. Using the rack mount kit, attach the 2 mounting brackets onto the sides of the unit with the 4 screws (M3x6) included.

ATEN VK112EU - Single Rack Mount (2X-049G) - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with ports and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
  1. Align the mounting brackets' screw holes with that of the front of the rack, and secure the unit onto the rack using 2 self-supplied screws.

ATEN VK112EU - Single Rack Mount (2X-049G) - 2

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a server rack setup with vertical supports and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

Double Rack Mount (2X-021G)

  1. Remove 2 screws at the bottom and 1 screw at the side from each of the two VK1100A / VK1200 units, as shown below.

ATEN VK112EU - Double Rack Mount (2X-021G) - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of two electronic device modules with mounting holes and control panels (no text or symbols)
  1. Use 4 of the screws from step 2 to secure the two VK1100A / VK1200 units together with the link bracket. Then install the left and right mounting brackets onto the sides of the units using 2 of the M3x5 and M3x6 screws included.

ATEN VK112EU - Double Rack Mount (2X-021G) - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with labeled components (no text or symbols present)
  1. Align the mounting brackets' screw holes with that of the front of the rack, and secure the units onto the rack using 4 self-supplied screw.

ATEN VK112EU - Double Rack Mount (2X-021G) - 3

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a server rack setup with vertical racks and base platform (no text or symbols)

■ VK1100

Optionally purchase an ATEN Rack Mount Kit (2X-031G) to install VK1100 onto a 19" (1U) system rack.

  1. Remove the 2 screws from the bottom and 1 screw from each side of the unit.

ATEN VK112EU - ■ VK1100 - 1

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a rectangular electronic device with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)
  1. Using the 2 bottom screws from step 1 and 2 M3x6 screws from the rack mount kit, secure the mounting brackets to the sides of the VK1100.

M3X6 Hexagon Screw

  1. Use 4 self-supplied screw to secure the mounting brackets onto the rack.

ATEN VK112EU - ■ VK1100 - 3

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a structural frame assembly with vertical supports and a central support block (no text or symbols)

Control Box Connections

To set up each device, refer to the installation diagrams on the pages that follows (each step provides a corresponding page with diagram), and do the following:

  1. Use a grounding wire to ground the unit by connecting one end to the grounding terminal and the other end to a suitable grounded object.

Note: Do not omit this step. Proper grounding helps prevent damage to the unit from surges or static electricity.

  1. Plug the power cord into the Control Box's power socket, and connect it to an AC power source.
  2. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the VK1100A / VK2100A's LAN (Ethernet) port or VK1200 / VK2200's Control LAN port to a secured subnetwork.
  3. (Optional) For VK1200 / VK2200, use another Cat 5e/6 cable to connect its LAN port to the corporate network.
  4. Use the DC output terminals to wire 12 V DC power connections using the instructions on page 31.
  5. Use the relay terminals to wire relay device connections using the instructions on page 33.
  6. Use the IR / serial (RS-232 TX) terminals to wire IR or serial device connections using the instructions on page 34.
  7. Use the digital I/O terminals to wire digital input / output device connections using the instructions on page 36.
  8. Use the 3-pin RS-232 terminals to wire RS-232 serial device connections using the instructions on page 38.
  9. Use the 5-pin RS-232/422/485 terminals to wire the corresponding serial device connections using the instructions on page 40.

  10. Connect IP-based devices to the same network as the Control Box. Refer to Ethernet / Control LAN, page 41 for details.

Note:

  • For KNX-compliant devices, connect the devices to a KNX IP interface, and then connect the KNX IP interface to the network where the Control Box is installed.
  • To check if the KNX functions are supported by the Control Box, see Specifications, page 317.

  • Start the unit by switching on its power switch.

  • For VK1200 / VK2200, use the LCD panel to set its ID.

VK1100A Installation Diagram

ATEN VK112EU - VK1100A Installation Diagram - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Projector Lift Curtain Screen"] --> B["Relay"]
    C["Air Conditioning"] --> D["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"]
    E["Lighting Control"] --> D
    F["Video Matrix Switch"] --> D
    G["Power Distribution Unit"] --> D
    H["Rear View"] --> I["Power Cord"]
    H --> J["Terminal Block"]
    H --> K["Sensor"]
    H --> L["Door Sensor"]
    H --> M["Drain/Power Amplifier Video"]
    H --> N["Audio Mixer"]
    H --> O["Conferencing"]
    P["DI / DO"] --> Q["IR / RS-232"]
    R["Ethernet"] --> S["Power"]
    R --> T["Power"]
    U["Relay"] --> V["Relay"]
    W["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"] --> X["Relay"]
    Y["RS-232"] --> Z["Relay"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style T fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style V fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style Y fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style Z fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

VK1200 Installation Diagram

ATEN VK112EU - VK1200 Installation Diagram - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Power"] --> B["Power cord"]
    C["Terminal Block Sensor"] --> D["DI / DO Ethernet"]
    E["TV Blu-ray Player Amplifier Video"] --> F["IR / RS-232"]
    G["Audio Mixer Door Sensor Occupancy Conferencing"] --> H["Ethernet"]
    I["Power Distribution Unit"] --> J["Relay"]
    K["Projector Lift Curtain Screen"] --> L["Relay"]
    M["Air Conditioning"] --> N["Relay"]
    O["Lighting Control Project"] --> P["Relay"]
    Q["Video Matrix Switch"] --> R["Relay"]
    S["Power"] --> T["Rear View"]
    U["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"] --> V["Relay"]
    W["RS-232"] --> X["Relay"]
    Y["Power"] --> Z["Power"]
    AA["Power"] --> AB["Power"]
    AC["Power"] --> AD["Power"]
    AE["Power"] --> AF["Power"]
    AG["Power"] --> AH["Power"]

VK2100A Installation Diagram

ATEN VK112EU - VK2100A Installation Diagram - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph Rear View
        A["① Power Power"] --> B["② power cord"]
        B --> C["⑤ Terminal Block"]
        C --> D["⑧ Sensor"]
        D --> E["DI / DO"]
        E --> F["⑦ IR / RS-232"]
        F --> G["⑧ Audio-Mixer"]
        G --> H["③ Video Conferencing"]
    end

    subgraph Rear View
        I["⑥ Projector Lift"] --> J["Relay"]
        K["⑦ Air Conditioning"] --> L["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"]
        M["⑩ Lighting Control"] --> N["RS-232"]
        O["⑪ Video Matrix Switch"] --> P["RS-232"]
        Q["⑨ Power Distribution Unit"] --> R["Relay"]
        S["⑪ Power Distribution Unit"] --> T["Relay"]
    end

    style Rear View fill:#f9f9f9,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#333
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style Rear View fill:#fff2cc,stroke:#000
    style rear view fill:#f9f9f9,stroke:#333
    style rear view fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333

VK2200 Installation Diagram
ATEN VK112EU - VK2100A Installation Diagram - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["① Power cord"] --> B["② Tower Block"]
    B --> C["⑤ Power Power"]
    C --> D["⑥ Curtain Lift Projector Screen"]
    D --> E["⑦ IR / RS-232 Sensor"]
    E --> F["⑧ Door Sensor Occancy Blu-ray Player Amplifier"]
    F --> G["⑨ Lighting Video Matrix Switch"]
    G --> H["⑩ Power Distribution Unit"]
    H --> I["④ ATEN UnizonProjector"]
    I --> J["Rear View"]
    J --> K["⑤ Relay"]
    K --> L["⑥ RF Array"]
    L --> M["⑦ Ethernet"]
    M --> N["⑧ AI Audio Mixer Video Conferencing"]
    N --> O["⑨ Ethernet Ethernet"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

12 V DC Power Output

ATEN Control Box offers the following 12 V DC outputs for providing power to hardware devices:

12V DC Power Output VK1100A / VK1200 VK2100A /VK2200
Number of Channels 1 4
Max. Power Supply DC12 V, 1 A DC 12 V, 2 A

The outputs can power one or four independent hardware devices, one or four loops for connected relay devices, or one or four digital output devices.

If the combined current of the ports exceeds 1 A (VK1100A / VK1200) or 2 A (VK2100A / VK2200), the DC power overload LED lights orange, an alarm beeps three times, and the ports are turned off. To return power to the ports, power off the Control Box, unplug all hardware connected to the 12 V DC output ports, power on the Control Box, and then plug in the hardware devices, one at a time, and make sure the current does not exceed 1 A or 2 A.

The diagrams on the next three pages show ports on the VK2100A / VK2200. The VK1100A / VK1200 is the same except that it has fewer 12 V DC terminal blocks.

Independent Power Supply

12 V DC Output Ports Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max DC OUTPUT:12V === 24W TOTAL 3 4 1 + - + - 2 Connects to Provides 12 V DC power to independent hardware devices.

Relay Power Supply

ATEN VK112EU - Relay Power Supply - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["12 V DC Output Ports"] --> B["DC"]
    A --> C["RELAY"]
    B --> D["Output: 12V = 24W TOTAL"]
    C --> E["INPUT: 24V = MAXIMUM"]
    D --> F["Provides 12 V DC power for the relay loop."]
    E --> G["Connects to"]
    G --> H["Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting, Motorized Equipment, Motion Device, etc."]
    H --> I["Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max"]

Digital Output Power Supply

12 V DC Output Ports
ATEN VK112EU - Digital Output Power Supply - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max"] --> B["DC"]
    B --> C["Output: 12V DC = 24W TOTAL"]
    B --> D["I/O: 1 2 3 4 GND"]
    B --> E["Connects to: Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting and Equipment Control."]
    B --> F["Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop."]

Digital Output Dual Power Supply (VK2100A/ VK2200 only)

12 V DC Output Ports
Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max DC OUTPUT:12V = 24W TOTAL 3 + - + - 4 1 + - + - 2 I/O 1 2 3 4 GND

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Output Dual Power Supply (VK2100A/ VK2200 only) - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides connection to digital output #1.| B["Terminal Block 2"]
    C["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| D["Terminal Block 2"]
    E["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides connection to digital output #2.| F["Terminal Block 1"]
    G["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| H["Terminal Block 2"]
    I["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| J["Terminal Block 1"]
    K["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| L["Terminal Block 2"]
    M["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| N["Terminal Block 1"]
    O["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| P["Terminal Block 2"]
    Q["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| R["Terminal Block 1"]
    S["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| T["Terminal Block 2"]
    U["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| V["Terminal Block 1"]
    W["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| X["Terminal Block 2"]
    Y["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| Z["Terminal Block 1"]
    AA["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| AB["Terminal Block 2"]
    AC["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| AD["Terminal Block 1"]
    AE["Terminal Block 1"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| AF["Terminal Block 2"]
    AG["Terminal Block 2"] -->|Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop.| AH["Terminal Block 1"]

Relay

ATEN Control Box provides the following isolated relays:

Relay VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A VK2200
Number of Channels 4 8
Contact Rating 24 V DC, 2 A
Default Status Normally Open

Relay Channels NO, Isolated Relays: 24 V DC 2 A Max RELAY 3 4 1 2 INPUT:24V ≡ MAXIMUM Normally Open Closed 1 2 Connects to Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting, Motorized Equipment, Motion Device, etc.

IR / Serial

ATEN Control Box provides the following IR / serial (RS-232) ports:

IR / SerialVK1100AVK1200VK2100A VK2200
2-Pin IR/Serial 2 4 8
IRCarrier Frequency 10 ~ 455 kHz
Default Level Ωow
Serial(RS-232)Baud rate 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)
Data bit 7, 8 (default)
Stop bit 1 (default), 2
Parity None (default), Even, Odd
Signal Level TTΩ (0 ~ 5 V DC) TTΩ (0 ~ 5 V DC)

ATEN VK112EU - IR / Serial - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["IR/SERIAL"] --> B["TTL Level (0 ~ 5 V)<br>Carrier Frequency:<br>10 ~ 455 kHz"]
    A --> C["RS-232 Ports"]
    C --> D["Unidirectional (0 ~ 5 V<br>or +/-5 V)<br>Baud Rate: 300 to 115200<br>(default: 9600)<br>Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7<br>Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2<br>Parity: None (default), Even or Odd"]
    A --> E["Connects to"]
    E --> F["IR: Blu-ray / DVD Player, TV,<br>Audio Receiver, Projector, etc.<br>RS-232: Camera, Projector,<br>Switch, Audio Mixer, Multimedia<br>Device, etc."]

By default, the unidirectional IR / serial channels are set to transmit IR signals.

IR Connection: Connect a transmitter cable to a set of IR and ground terminals of the Control Box, and install the IR transmitter on or near the IR device's IR receiving port, as shown on page 35.

Serial Connection: Connect a serial device's receiver (RX) and ground terminals to a set of serial (TX) and ground terminals of the Control Box. Then configure the same serial port settings on both the Control Box and the connecting serial device, allowing them to communicate.

One IR Transmitter

IR/SERIAL S C T G 1 2 3 4 ← IR Receiver

Two IR Transmitters

ATEN VK112EU - Two IR Transmitters - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["IR/SERIAL"] -->|1 2| B["Unidirectional IR"]
    A -->|3 4| C["2 x IR Transmitters"]
    C --> D["TV Broadcast"]

Digital I/O

The VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 provides the following digital input / output channels:

Digital I/O VK1100A / VK1200 VK2100A VK2200
Number of Channels 248
Digital InputVDC ModeVoltage range: 0 ~ 24 V DCProgrammable range: 1 ~ 24 V DC
Dry Contact Mode Pull-up: 2 kΩ to +12 V DC
Digital OutputNormally Open300 mA sink from 24 V DC

Digital Input (Dry Contact):

Connects to digital I/O devices with an input loop — open or closed — for providing indicators from sensors or switches of an event, which can be used by the Control Box to trigger events and/or functions.

Digital Input (VDC Mode):

Connects to DC devices (temperature, current and monitor sensors) for providing voltage signals (1 to 24 V) to the ATEN Control Box, to trigger certain events and/or functions when the voltage signals are above or below the defined threshold.

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Input (VDC Mode): - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Programmable Digital Input Channels"] --> B["I/O 1 2 3 4 GND"]
    B --> C["Connects to: Digital Input: Switches, Sensors Monitors and Button Triggers."]
    B --> D["Digital Input: VDC Mode: -Input Voltage Range: 0 ~ 24 V DC; Programmable Range: 1 ~ 24 VDC"]
    D --> E["Dry Contact Mode: -Pull-up 2 kΩ to +12 V DC"]

Digital Output:

Provides non-powered dry contact (open and closed) circuit control of hardware devices, such as electric screens, projector lifts and other motorized equipment, which must be connected using a relay module, as shown below.

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Input (VDC Mode): - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Programmable Digital Output Channels"] --> B["I/O Pin 1-4 GND"]
    B --> C["Connects to: Digital Output: Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting and Equipment Control."]
    C --> D["Relay Module"]

RS-232 (3-Pin)

VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 provides the following 3-pin RS-232 ports:

RS-232 (3-pin) VK1100A / VK1200 VK2100AVK2200
Number of Channels 14 6
Baud rate 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)
Data bit 7, 8 (default)
Stop bit 1 (default), 2
Parity None (default), Even, Odd

Connect to devices for controlling and receiving status messages from them. For bidirectional RS-232 control, the transmit (TX), receive (RX) and ground (GND) terminals must be wired on both the ATEN Control System and the device connecting.

ATEN VK112EU - RS-232 (3-Pin) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SERIAL RS-232"] --> B["Bidirectional RS-232 Ports"]
    B --> C["Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)"]
    B --> D["Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7"]
    B --> E["Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2"]
    B --> F["Parity: None (default), even or odd"]
    A --> G["Connects to Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (DB-9)

These two or four (VK1100 / VK2100) bidirectional ports provide serial control of hardware devices (projectors, switches, etc.) with programmable pin assignments and receive status messages from the connected devices. The diagram below shows ports on the VK2100. The VK1100 is the same except that it has fewer ports.

ATEN VK112EU - RS-232 / 422 / 485 (DB-9) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SERIAL RS-232/422/485"] --> B["3"]
    A --> C["4"]
    A --> D["5"]
    A --> E["6"]
    B --> F["Connects to: Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]
    C --> F
    D --> F
    E --> F
    F --> G["Configurable by pin assignment"]
    G --> H["Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)"]
    G --> I["Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7"]
    G --> J["Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2"]
    G --> K["Parity: None (default), Even or Odd"]
    G --> L["Flow Control: None (default) or RTS/CTS"]

Pin Assignments

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485
pin 2: RX pin 1:RX- pin 3: D+
pin 3: TX pin 2:RX+ pin 4: D-
pin 5: GND pin 3:TX+pin 5: GND*Note:A ground terminal connection is recommended but not required.
pin 7: RTS pin 4:TX-
pin 8: CTS pin 5:GND

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (5-Pin)

The ATEN Control System provides the following RS-232/422/485 ports:

VK1100A / VK1200 VK2100A / VK2200
Number of Channels 1 2
Baud rate 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)
Data bit 7, 8 (default)
Stop bit 1 (default), 2
Parity None (default), Even, Odd

Connect to devices, configurable by pin assignments, for controlling and receiving status messages from them.

ATEN VK112EU - RS-232 / 422 / 485 (5-Pin) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SERIAL RS-232 / 422 / 485"] --> B["PIN ASSIGNMENT"]
    B --> C["Bidirectional RS-232 / 422 / 485 Ports"]
    C --> D["Connects to Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

Ethernet / Control LAN

The Ethernet / Control LAN port provides an Ethernet connection for controlling up to 25 (VK1100A / VK2100A) or 64 (VK1200 / VK2200) LAN devices and/or remote control by ATEN Keypads, Touch Panel, and the ATEN Control System app on a mobile device in a network.

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet / Control LAN - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Ethernet / Control LAN"] --> B["Ethernet Switch"]
    B --> C["KNX IP Interface"]
    C --> D["Lighting"]
    C --> E["HVAC Systems"]
    F["The RJ-45 port is used to connect and access TCP, UDP, PJLink, ONVIF, HTTP, HTTPS, and Telnet devices. VK1200 / 2200 can operate as a DHCP server for assigning IP addresses to the devices"] --> G["ONVIF"]
    G --> H["TCP"]
    H --> I["PJLink"]
    I --> J["Telnet"]
    J --> K["Modular Matrix Switch"]
    K --> L["Telnet"]
    L --> M["eco PDU"]
    M --> N["UDP"]
    N --> O["HTTP HTTPS"]
    O --> P["Video Conferencing System"]

ATEN Control Pad

Panel Components

VK0100

Front View Rear View
Diagram of a device rear panel with labeled components including internal compartments and mounting points

Diagram of an electronic device interior with numbered components labeled 4, 5, 6, and 7

9 8 Side View

VK0200

Front View ① ② ③

Side View

Rear View 4 6 7 0 0 5

Diagram of a device interior with numbered components, likely illustrating a mechanical or electronic layout.

No.Component Description
1buttons and button ΩEDsIndicate the status of the Control Pad and if the function on each button, e.g. lighting or projector, is on or off. For detailed information about device/function status under different ΩED activities, seeLED Indications, page 44.
2system ΩEDs Contains aΩAN and a link ΩED to indicate network connection and data transmission status:◆ΩAN ΩED lights green to indicate that the Control Pad is connected to network.◆Ωink ΩED lights green to indicate that the Control Pad is actively transmitting and receiving data.
3reset button◆To clear all the configurations except the network settings, press and hold the reset button for 8 seconds.◆To reset the network settings, press the reset button once.
4RS-232 serial ports Connect up to two RS-232 serial devices.
5relay channels Connect up to two relay devices. Relay contacts are normally open, isolated with a contact rating of 24 V DC, 1 A max.
6digital input Port Connect to one digital input device that supports programmable input (1 ~ 5 V DC) or dry contact (pull-up 2k ohms to 5 V DC).
7Ethernet port Connects to an Ethernet cable to provide power and access to the network.
8control pad ID switch Sets an ID for the Control Pad.
9DC power port Connects to a 5 V DC power adapter.

LED Indications

Refer to the table below for the status descriptions of a Control Pad indicated by button LEDs.

Button LED StatusLED Activity Control Pad Status
a button ΩED lightsorange The Control Padis powered on and the button is currently off.
a button ΩED lightswhite The Control Padis powered on and the button is currently on.
a button ΩED blinksorange and white repeatedlyThe function assigned to the button is being executed.
all button ΩEDs blinkorange and white onceThe Control Pad is restoring its default settings.
all button ΩEDs blinkorange and white repeatedlyThe firmware of the Control Pad is being upgraded.

Installing the Control Pads

  1. Prepare the installation site.

a) Choose a location where cables are free of interference. You can install the Control Pad on walls, desks, and podiums.
b) Prepare a recession on the chosen location to accommodate the Control Pad. You can install the Control Pad directly on the chosen location or through a wall box. For recommended cutout dimensions, see CAD and Panel Cutout Diagrams, page 339.

  1. Connect the Control Pad to various devices, for integration and control, refer to the corresponding interface for the wiring information of each:

♦ Wiring Information, page 50
♦ Relay Connections, page 51
♦ Digital Input Device, page 52

Note: To expand connection ports on the Control Pad, install ATEN Expansion Boxes.

  1. To use PoE, connect the Control Pad to a PoE switch via an Ethernet cable. For details, see Ethernet, page 53.

Note: If you do not have a power sourcing equipment for PoE, contact your local sales representative to purchase a power adapter and then follow the steps below to prepare the power cord.

1 +5V GND 5mm 2 3 +5V GND (+) (-)

(1) Cut the connector end of the power adapter.
(2) Strip 5 mm(0.5 cm) off the insulation cover of the power adapter cable to expose the +5V wire and the grounding wire.
(3) Insert the expose +5V wire and the grounding wire tightly into the provided 2-pin terminal block connector. Use a voltmeter to determine the polarity of an exposed wire.

VK0100
RS-232 Projector Video Switch Relay Lighting Control Screen Projector Lift DI Dry Contact Device Door Sensor PoE Switch Network Ethernet Cable Projector Conference System Camera

VK0200

ATEN VK112EU - Installing the Control Pads - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Projector Lift"] --> B["Screen"]
    B --> C["Lighting Control"]
    C --> D["Relay"]
    D --> E["Projector Video Switch"]
    E --> F["DI"]
    F --> G["Dry Contact Device"]
    F --> H["Door Sensor"]
    I["PoE Switch"] --> J["Network"]
    K["Ethernet Cable"] --> L["Conference System"]
    M["Camera"] --> N["Projector"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
  1. Use the ID Switch to assign an ID to the Control Pad.

Note: It is possible to install more than 16 controllers under the same subnet. In which case, the 17th controller and the ones added after that will each be sharing its ID with another controller. If you have any ATEN Expansion Box and/or Keypad connected to controllers using shared IDs, reconfigure the connection mode. For details, see Controller Properties, page 108.

  1. Power on all the devices. The button LEDs light orange.
  2. Assemble the button caps onto the Control Pad.

a) Assemble button caps of the same row with each other. Put the button with two latches to the far right.

ATEN VK112EU - Installing the Control Pads - 4

b) From the top row, attach each row of button caps to the Control Pad by pressing on the latches.

Diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating downward motion.

Caution: When removing button caps, place your fingers on the top of button caps and then press downwards, as illustrated below. Pressing upwards from the bottom may cause damages to the button caps.

MP1

  1. Mount the Control Pad to the chosen location with or without a wall box.

a) Secure the Control Pad to the chosen location with self-prepared screws.

b) Install the supplied faceplate to the Control Pad.

VK0100
ATEN VK112EU - Installing the Control Pads - 7

natural_image Exploded view diagram of a device showing internal components and assembly (no text or labels)

VK0200 (for EU type)
ATEN VK112EU - Installing the Control Pads - 8

natural_image Diagram of a device assembly showing components from a front panel to an internal grid and housing (no text or labels)

VK0200 (for MK type)
ATEN VK112EU - Installing the Control Pads - 9

natural_image Diagram showing a multi-step assembly of electronic components, including a front panel, grid, and housing (no text or labels)

Wiring Information

RS-232 Serial Connection

The two bidirectional RS-232 ports on the Control Pad provide serial control of hardware devices (projectors, matrix switches, etc.) and receive status messages from the connected devices. For bidirectional RS-232 control, the transmit, receive, and ground pins must be wired on both the Control Pad and hardware device. Each hardware device requires different wiring. Please consult each hardware device's manual for details.

ATEN VK112EU - RS-232 Serial Connection - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Bidirectional RS-232 Ports"] --> B["Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)"]
    B --> C["Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7"]
    B --> D["Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2"]
    B --> E["Parity: None (default), even or odd"]
    F["SERIAL RS-232"] --> G["TX RX GND 1"]
    F --> H["TX RX GND 2"]
    I["Connects to"] --> J["Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]

Relay Connections

These 2 relay channels provide connections to control hardware devices such as electric screens, projector lifts and other motorized equipment. Each relay is normally open by default.

ATEN VK112EU - Relay Connections - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["RELAY"] -->|INPUT:24V==MAXIMUM| B["2 x Relay Channels"]
    B --> C["Connects to"]
    C --> D["Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting, Motorized Equipment, Motion Device, etc."]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    note1["Normally Open, Isolated Relays\nContact Rating: 24VDC 1A Max"] --> A
    note2["Normally Open"] --> C
    note3["Closed"] --> C

Digital Input Device

The digital input port on the Control Pad can be used to install a digital input device such as a switch or a sensor. The digital input channel can be configured to the VDC mode or the Dry Contact mode.

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Input Device - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["I/O 1 GND"] --> B["Connects to Digital Input: Switches, Sensors, Monitors, or Button"]
    C["1 x Programmable Digital Input Channel"] --> D["Digital Input VDC Mode: -Input Voltage Range: 0 to 5 VDC, -Programmable Range: 1 to 5 VDC"]
    C --> E["Dry Contact Mode: -Pull-up 2k ohms to +5 VDC"]

Digital Input (Dry Contact):

Digital inputs are hardware devices (switches, sensors, monitors) with two circuit signals – open and closed. These two signals provide indicators from sensors or switches of an event. An event can be the on/off power, dry contact, sensor or switch status from a device. This information is used to trigger events and functions through the Control Pad.

Digital Input (VDC):

Digital input 5VDC hardware devices (temperature, current and monitor sensors) provide voltage signals between 1 and 5. A digital input port detects if a voltage is above/below a specific threshold (1 to 5). If the voltage coming from a hardware device is higher than the set value, the Control Pad will detect the digital input as high. If the voltage coming from a hardware device is lower than the set value, the Control Pad will detect the digital input as low. This information is used to trigger events and functions through the Control Pad.

Ethernet

The RJ-45 port provides an Ethernet connection for accessing the web console (page 73), controlling up to 8 IP devices, and remote control by the Control System app within the same subnetwork.

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Ethernet"] --> B["Ethernet Switch"]
    B --> C["KNX IP Interface"]
    C --> D["Lighting"]
    C --> E["HVAC Systems"]
    F["The RJ-45 port is used to connect and access TCP, UDP, PJLink, ONVIF, HTTP, HTTPS, and Telnet devices."] --> G["ONVIF"]
    G --> H["TCP"]
    H --> I["PJLink"]
    I --> J["Telnet"]
    J --> K["Modular Matrix Switch"]
    K --> L["Telnet"]
    L --> M["eco PDU"]
    M --> N["UDP"]
    N --> O["HTTP HTTPS"]
    O --> P["Video Conferencing System"]
    B --> Q["ATEN"]
    Q --> R["Expansion Box"]

ATEN Expansion Box

ATEN Expansion Boxes (sold separately) provide additional ports for a flexible expansion of the ATEN Control System. This allows you to add and control additional devices in an environment when more devices are required. With the advantage of an Ethernet-based connection, the expansion boxes are easily connected to the ATEN controller via a LAN connection from a variety of locations across a network. The diagram below provides a setup example using the VK224, a 4-Port Serial Expansion Box.

ATEN VK112EU - ATEN Expansion Box - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Control Box"] --> B["Network"]
    B --> C["Controller ID"]
    B --> D["Expander ID"]
    B --> E["RS-232/422/485"]
    B --> F["LAN"]
    B --> G["3"]
    B --> H["4"]
    B --> I["Power Distribution Unit"]
    B --> J["Video Matrix Projector Camera"]
    B --> K["Serial Devices"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Note:

  • To add and configure ATEN Expansion Boxes, see Left Sidebar, page 102 and Expansion Box (Expander), page 109.
  • The available Expansion Box models include:
Model Description
VK224 4-Port Serial Expansion
VK236 6-Port IR/Serial Expansion Box
VK248 8-Channel Relay Expansion Box
VK258 8-Channel Digital I/O Expansion Box

Control Interface Devices

ATEN Keypad

The ATEN Keypad mounts to a wall to provide control of hardware through a controller. The setup of the Keypad to the Control System can be illustrated as follows:

ATEN Keypad Powered by PoE or DC 5V Ethernet Switch VK1100 (Rear) Screen BD-Player ProjectorLight Video Switch

Note:

- The following Keypad models are available:

Model Description
VK108US 8-Button Keypad (US, 1 Gang)
VK112EU 12-Button Keypad (EU, 2 Gang)

- To have your Keypad buttons customized with text engraving, visit this page to make your order:

https://www.aten.com/ext_data/global_en/VK_Keypad_Engraving_Service/aten_keypad.html

Hardware Overview

VK108US

Front View ① ② ③ ④

Rear View ⑧

Side View
6

Side View
Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled 5 and 7

VK112EU

ATEN VK112EU - VK112EU - 1

No.Component Description
1 buttons VK108USThe Keypad can be customized up to 14 different layouts using 4 to 8 buttons.
VK112EUThe Keypad can be customized up to 12 different layouts using 6 to 12 buttons.
2 button ΩEDs Indicatefunction and Keypad statuses. For detailed information, seeLED Indications, page 58.
3 system ΩED indicators♦ΩAN: lights green to indicate that the Keypad is connected to ΩAN.♦Ωink: lights green to indicate that the Keypad is connected to the assigned controller.
4 reset pushbutton Pressto reset the Keypad to its default network settings.
5 DC power Plug a poweradapter into this DC power input.
6 keypad ID switch Setsan ID to the Keypad (1~8).
7 controller ID switchSets the ID of the controller (1 ~ 16) to which the Keypad connects.
8 ΩAN port◆ Connects the Keypad to ΩAN◆ Supplies power (PoE) if a power sourcing equipment is installed.

LED Indications

Refer to the table below for the status descriptions of a Keypad indicated by button LEDs.

Keypad Button LED Activity Keypad Status
a button ΩED lightsorange The Keypad is powered on and the button is currently off.
lights white The Keypad is powered on and the button is currently on.
blinks orange and white repeatedlyThe function assigned to the button is being executed.
all button ΩEDsblink orange and white repeatedlyThe firmware of the Control Pad is being upgraded.
blink orange The Keypad is disconnected from the Control Box.

Layout Examples

VK108US

ATEN VK112EU - VK108US - 1

VK112EU

ATEN VK112EU - VK112EU - 1

natural_image Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

ATEN

ΔTEN

ATEN

ATEN VK112EU - VK112EU - 5

natural_image Diagram of a multi-compartment storage unit labeled 'ATEN' (no text or symbols on the unit itself)

4TEN

ATEN VK112EU - VK112EU - 7

natural_image Diagram of a grid layout with labeled boxes and 'AZEN' text at bottom (no readable document content)

ATEN VK112EU - VK112EU - 8

natural_image Diagram of a device panel with multiple compartments and labeled 'ATEN' (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

ATEN VK112EU - VK112EU - 9

natural_image Diagram of a grid layout with labeled 'ΔTEN' at bottom (no other text or symbols)

ATEN

ATEN

ATEN

Installing ATEN Keypad

  1. Prepare the installation site.

a) Choose a location where cables are free of interference. You can install the keypad on walls, desks, and podiums.
b) Prepare a recession on the chosen location to accommodate the keypad. You can install the keypad directly on the chosen location or through a wall box. For recommended cutout dimensions, see CAD and Panel Cutout Diagrams, page 339.

  1. Use the keypad ID switch to set an ID for the unit, and set the controller ID switch to the ID of the controller to which you wish to connect.

Note: One ATEN Control Box/ Control Pad can work with up to 8 Keypads.

  1. Supply power and network connectivity to the keypad. Do one of the following:

  2. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the keypad to a PoE switch.

  3. If you do not have a power sourcing equipment, use an Ethernet cable to connect the keypad to LAN and a power adapter to supply power. Follow the steps below to install a terminal block to the power adapter.

① +5V GND 5mm ② ③ +5V GND (+) (-)

(1) Cut the connector end of the power adapter.
(2) Strip 5 mm(0.5 cm) off the insulation cover of the power adapter cable to expose the +5V wire and the grounding wire.
(3) Insert the expose +5V wire and the grounding wire tightly into the provided 2-pin terminal block connector. Use a voltmeter to determine the polarity of an exposed wire.

The LAN LED light green to indicate that the Keypad is supplied with power and successfully linked to the network.

Note:

  • Make sure to install the Keypad to the same subnet with its assigned controller.
  • The Keypad adopts the default IP address 192.168.0.60 if the network switch does not support DHCP. To configure the IP address, log in the web interface using the default IP address and the default password (password).

  • Secure the Keypad to the chosen surface and install the button caps and faceplate.

a) Secure the Keypad to the chosen surface using two screws.

VK108US
ATEN VK112EU - Note: - 1

natural_image Exploded view diagram of a device assembly showing internal components and connection to a box (no text or labels)

VK112EU
ATEN VK112EU - Note: - 2

b) Follow the layout created in the Viewer and assemble the button caps onto the Keypad.

- Assemble button caps of the same row with each other. Put the button with two latches to the far right.

ATEN VK112EU - Note: - 3

- From the top row, attach each row of button caps to the Keypad by pressing on the latches.

Diagram of a traditional Chinese architectural layout with labeled components and directional arrows indicating structural changes.

Caution: When removing button caps, place your fingers on the top of button caps and then press downwards, as illustrated below. Pressing upwards from the bottom may cause damages to the button caps.

ATEN VK112EU - Note: - 5

natural_image Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols
  1. Attach the faceplate to the Keypad.

IMPORTANT: After installing the Keypad, create a control interface (Viewer) and upload the Viewer to the controller. For details, see Design, page 100.

ATEN Touch Panel

Panel Overview

ATEN VK112EU - Panel Overview - 1

No.Component Description
1touch screen Tap on the screen to operate the control system and/or configure the touch panel.
2status ΩED Ωights on when the touch panel is powered on.
3function button Press the Function button to show the settings page.
4brightness up / down Press to adjust the display brightness.
5volume up / down Press to adjust the volume of the touch panel.
6screw holes for panel plateScrew holes used to secure a panel plate to mount the touch panel on a wall.
7speakers Plays beep soundsto indicate control actions.
8power switch Turns the touch panel on or off.
9power jack Receives a power cord.
10reserved for debugging purposeThese ports are reserved for debugging.
11USB Micro-B port Use thisport to upgrade/downgrade the device firmware.
12USB type-A port Use this portto update the ATEN Control System app installed in the Touch Panel. For details, see Updating Control System App, page 68.
13ΩAN port with PoE Receivesan Ethernet cable which supplies network connectivity (and power by PoE).

Mounting the Touch Panel

The VK330 Touch Panel supports desk mount, wall mount, or any 3rd-party mounting accessory that is VESA compliant (75 x 75 mm). For more information about the mounting accessories, please visit the product web page.

Desk Mount

To mount the VK330 on a desk using ATEN desk mount accessory — VK304 — refer to the diagram below.

ATEN VK112EU - Desk Mount - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with projection lines and a screen (no text or symbols)

Wall Mount

To mount the VK330 onto a wall using ATEN wall mount accessory — VK302 — follow the steps and refer to the diagrams below.

  1. Using the wall anchors and screws, secure the wall plate to the wall in the illustrated direction. Secure the panel plate to the VK330 using the M4 screws.

  2. Slide the panel plate to the wall plate to secure the VK330 onto the wall.

ATEN VK112EU - Wall Mount - 1

Installing the Touch Panel

  1. Using the 90° RJ-45 cable adapter (if provided for your package edition) and an Ethernet cable, connect the unit to a PoE switch or PoE injector to provide power and access to the network.

  2. Put the power switch to ON. The status ΩED lights green and the Touch Panel starts loading and displays the Start page.

ATEN VK112EU - Installing the Touch Panel - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["SYSTEM"]
    B --> C["FOR"]
    C --> D["NO"]
    D --> E["C"]
    E --> F["DEMO"]
    style A fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style B fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style F fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    note right of A: Control
    note right of B: Without Complication

Operating the Touch Panel

Note: In highly humid environment, it is advised that you keep the touch panel powered on and in operation to prevent fogging inside the touch panel.

  • To configure system settings of the Touch Panel, press the Function button on the device open the system settings page.
  • To return to the ATEN Control System app from the settings page, tap Return to ATEN Control System App.
  • For details on using the Control System app, see Demo/Start Screen, page 282.

Changing the Interface Language

  1. Press the Function button.
  2. Tap System > Languages & input > Languages > + Add a language.
  3. Tap a preferred language. The selected option is added to the language list.
  4. Tap and hold the language you just added to the top of the list. The Touch Panel uses the language that lists first.

Configuring the Network Settings

  1. Press the Function button.
  2. Tap Network & Internet > Ethernet > Ethernet IP Mode to configure the settings.

Updating Control System App

To update the Control System app on your ATEN Touch Panel, follow the steps below.

  1. Download the Control System app from the product web page and save the file to a USB drive.
  2. Insert the USB drive to the USB Type-A port.
  3. Press the Function button to go to the system settings page.
  4. Tap Storage. Under Portable Storage, tap the USB device you inserted.
  5. Locate and tap the app file (.apk) to start the update.

Upgrading Firmware for ATEN Touch Panel

To upgrade the ATEN Touch Panel firmware on your ATEN Touch Panel, follow the steps below.

  1. Download the ATEN Touch Panel firmware package from the product web page.
  2. Unzip the downloaded firmware package.
  3. In the update folder, locate the update.zip file and save it to the root directory of a USB drive, e.g. E:\

Compressed Folder Tools VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.20210202_USB driver File Home Share View Extract VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.20210202_USB driver VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.20210202_USB driver Search VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.2... Quick access update 2/24/2021 10:55 AM Compressed tripp... 423,315 KB Desktop

  1. Insert the USB drive to the USB Type-A port of the Touch Panel.
  2. Press the Function button to go to the system settings page.
  3. Tap System > System updates.
  4. Follow the on-screen instructions to upgrade the firmware.
  5. The VK330 reboots itself when the firmware upgrade is complete.

Note: The Control System App installed on the touch panel may not be of the same version after this upgrade. Update the app to obtain the latest features and benefits.

This Page Intentionally Ωeft Blank

Chapter 3

Web-Based Configuration and

Control

Overview

The ATEN controller can be configured over a standard TCP/IP connection via its built-in Graphical User Interface (GUI). Because it can be accessed from anywhere over a network or the Internet, operators can easily log in via a web browser. The web interface can be used to upload licenses, set the access key, enable monitors and upgrade the firmware.

Determining the IP Address of the Controller

  • DHCP: When connected to a DHCP network, the ATEN controller is automatically assigned with an IP address upon startup. To determine the IP address of VK1200 / VK2200, see LCD Panel. To determine the IP address of other ATEN controllers, see IP Installer.
  • Non-DHCP: When no dynamic IP address is assigned to the ATEN controllers within 30 seconds after startup, their default network settings are applied, as described below:
Models Default IP Address
VK1200 / VK2200Control LAN 192.168.0.60
LAN 192.168.1.60
Other ATEN controllers 192.168.0.60

LCD Panel

For VK1200 / VK2200, users can find its network information on the LCD panel, via Information, as illustrated below.

UK2200 Control Box ID [81] > IP CLAN 192.168.0.68 LAN 10.0.1.100 > NEXT << BACK TO MENU

IP Installer

Using a Windows PC, download the IP Installer zip file in Support and Downloads from the ATEN controller's product web page. Then extract and execute IPInstaller.exe. A window similar to the one below appears.

Network Device IP Installer Device list Device Name Model Name MAC Address IP Address PE8208A PE6208A 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 CN9500 CN9600 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.100 VK108US VK108US 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.100 RCM101A RCM101A 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 SN300X SN3002P 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 vk2200 VK2200 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 VMO808HA VMO808HA 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 VK2100 VK2100 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 VK2100 VK2100 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 PN7320 PN7320 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 Exit About Protocol IPv4 Network adapter MAC 11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:11:IP IPv4 settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 255 255 Default gateway: 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Alternate DNS server: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. IPv6 settings Obtain an IPv6 address automatically (DHCP) Use the following IPv6 address: IPv6 address: Subnet profile length: Default gateway: Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server:

Make sure the proper network adapter is selected and click Enumerate to search for and display your ATEN controllers within the Device List.

Logging In

To access the GUI, type the IP address of the controller into the address bar of any browser. If a Security Alert dialog box appears, accept the certificate — it can be trusted. The Welcome screen appears:

WELCOME Enter Options Key Long To

  • The default access key is: password
  • Allows up to 8 concurrent logins
    ◆ Supports Internet Explorer 11

Dashboard

The Dashboard appears when you successfully log in to the controller. The Dashboard gives a quick view of each setting and provides a link to each page. Click Edit to configure the settings.

ATEN VK112EU - Dashboard - 1

pie VK2200 Information | Category | Value | | :--- | :--- | | Flash | 94.75% | | Space Used | 364,769,280 KB | | Space Available | 5,909,450,752 KB | | Total Space | 6,274,220,032 KB | | RAM | 6634% | | Space Used | 318,216 KB | | Space Available | 701,768 KB | | Total Space | 1,017,964 KB | | Licensee | 0.54K | | In Use | 1 | | Not In Use | 1 | | Total | 2 | | Access Key | 0.54K | | Viewer Access Key Setting | Monitor | 0.54K | General: Console ID 12 Controller IP: Control LAN IP MAC Address: 00:10.74.B6.C0.7A LAN IP: 10.3.52.92 MAC Address: 00:10.74.B6.80.7A Date & Time: 2000/01/01 00:00:38 FW Version: V3.2.316.001 Existing Viewer: All Rooms Viewer2 All Rooms Viewer1

The top bar provides two options:

ATEN VK112EU - Dashboard - 2

Click to enter the Settings page.

ATEN VK112EU - Dashboard - 3

Click to log out of the web console.

Settings

The Settings view contains tabs consisting of different configurations of the controller. The page is divided into two parts:

  • Interactive Display Panel: configures the options
  • Top Bar: provides icons to exit the settings page and log out of the web session.

General
Controller Info Device Name 3160_VK2298_ID6 Controller ID 6 Control Mode GUI Control LAN IP 10:3.52.82 MAC Address 00:10:74:23:40.2A LAN IP MAC Address 00:10:74:23:00.2A Date & Time ● Automatically ● Manually Time Zone IOMI+06 on Tape Preferred NTP Server JP Intp.net IP ■ Preferred Customer Server IP Alternate NTP Server US NY Clock.net IP ■ Alternate Customer Server IP Adjust Time Every 1 Days Sync Firmware Current Firmware V2.2.222.222 Update

The General tab contains network information and the time and firmware upgrade settings.

Setting Descriptions
Controller Info PProvides network and identification information pertaining to the controller.◆Device Name: Sets the device name.◆Controller ID: Displays the controller ID # set on the rear of the unit.◆Control Mode: Indicates the current configuration mode for the controller. Note that when the control mode changes from command-line to GUI mode, I/O configurations made through CΩI will be lost.◆GUI mode: When the controller is in GUI mode, it means that the last configuration was made by uploading a Viewer to the controller or by resetting the controller.◆Command-line mode: When the controller is in command-line mode, it means that the last configuration was made via command line interface.◆Control LAN IP: (Applicable to VK1200 / VK2200 only) Indicates the control ΩAN IP address.◆MAC Address: (Applicable to VK1200 / VK2200 only) Indicates the control ΩAN IP address.◆IP Address: Provides the IP address of the controller.◆MAC Address: Provides the hardware MAC address of the controller.
Date & Time◆ Automatically◆ Time Zone: Select a time zone for the controller. Choose the city that most closely corresponds to where it is located.NTP Server SettingsAssign an NTP server for the controller to synchronizes its clock. If the controller has access to the Internet, configure the Preferred NTP Server and Alternate NTP Server settings. If the controller is installed in a closed network, configure the Preferred Customer Server IP and Alternate Customer Server IP settings.◆ Preferred NTP Server: Select an NTP server to provide synchronization services to the controller. Make sure to use an NTP server that is located close to where the controller is installed to minimize propagation delays.◆ Alternate NTP Server: Select an alternate NTP server to which the controller connects when it is unable to connect to the preferred NTP server.◆ Preferred Customer Server IP: Select this option to use a private NTP server if the controller is installed in a closed network.◆ Alternate Customer Server IP: Select this option to set up a substitute server if the controller is unable to connect to the preferred server.◆ Adjust Time: Sets the interval at which the controller synchronizes its clock with the assigned NTP server.◆ Sync: Click this button to save your configuration and start synchronizing its clock with the assigned NTP server.◆ Manually: Use the drop-down lists to set the controller's time zone, date, and time.
Firmware◆ Displays the current firmware version of the controller and option to upgrade/downgrade the firmware.◆ To upgrade/downgrade the firmware, click Update.Important: Since the controller file system uses EXT2 for firmware version 3.0 onward instead of FAT32 for prior versions, downgrading a controller firmware from version 3.0 (or from any later version) to a version prior to 3.0 will result in file formatting. In this case, make sure to back up your project file before the downgrade.◆ Select Check FW Version for the controller to check if the device firmware is a later version than the browsed firmware file, and display the result.

Licenses for Mobile Control

A license is a software permit that an ATEN controller grants to a mobile device for remote control. If you have three licenses for a controller, you can have three mobile devices remotely operate the controller at the same time.

Note: When using an ATEN Touch Panel for remote control, make sure to upgrade the controller to version 2.8 or later, which recognizes the Touch Panel as an ATEN device and will not require a license.

Refer to the table below for the number of free licenses and the maximum number of paid licenses each controller supports. To purchase additional copies of license, contact your local sales representative.

LicensesATEN Control BoxATEN Control Pad (VK0100 / VK0200)
VK1100A / VK2100AVK1200 / VK2200
No. of free licenses 2 2 0
Maximum no. of licenses 16 32 10

You can use the Licenses tab to:

  • Find out the total number of licenses, the number of licenses that are available, and those that are in use
    ◆ Upload licenses to the ATEN controller
    ◆ View license information

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule (Total 2 license) #1 Aten iPad #2 8320N-MIKET Update License OffLine OffLine S-Tensor S-Tensor

Setting Description
Ωlicenses◆ In Use: displays the number of licenses being used by mobile devices.◆ Not in Use: displays the number of licenses available for use.◆ Total shows the number of licenses purchased for the controller.
Update ΩicenseClicking Add License opens the Add License window to import new licenses to the controller.
Remove When adevice is accessing the controller, you can click the Remove button to disconnect the session.

Storage

The Storage tab displays information about the flash and RAM usage for the controller, and the locations assigned for Viewers stored on the controller.

ATEN VK112EU - Storage - 1

pie | Category | Available Space (KB) | Percentage (%) | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Flash | 364,769,280 | 94.15 | | Ram | 316,938 | 66.07 | | Total Space | 1,017,984 | 100 | | Space Used | 316,938 | 100 | | Space Available | 701,046 | 100 | | Space Available | 5,909,450,752 | 100 | | Space Used | 364,769,280 | 94.15 | | All Rooms Viewer1 | - | - | | All Rooms Viewer2 | - | - | | All Rooms Viewer1 | - | - | | All Rooms Viewer2 | - | - | | All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewer1 & All Rooms Viewer2 & All Rooms Viewers | - | - | The chart displays the total space in KB for each category. The 'Existing Viewer' panel is also shown in the top-right corner.
Setting Descriptions
Flash This section shows the total amount of flash memory on the controller, as well as the space used and the space available for storing Viewers.
RAM This section shows the total space of working memory on the controller, as well as the space used and the space available for processing.
Existing ViewerThis section lists all the Viewers that are stored on the controller with their name and assigned room(s). Click Remove to delete a single Viewer or Remove All to delete all Viewers from the controller.

Access

The Access tab allows you to configure the access key (password) of the ATEN controller's web interface and to set a validity period for accessing the ATEN Control System using an activation key.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Monitor Network Connections Schedule Security Access Key Show on distributed Current Access Key Now Access Key Confirm Access Key ■ Enable View Access Key ■ Use Use Activation Key ■ Your access to ATEN Control System will expire in 30 days. Contact your system integrator to obtain the activation key required to regain access. Activation Key Confirm Activation Key Sale Use

Setting Description
Access Key Theaccess key is the password that is required to do the following:◆ Ωog in the ATEN controller's web interface.◆ Upload projects and Viewers from Configurator to ATEN controller (page 237).Download Viewers from ATEN controller to mobile devices using ATEN Control System App (page 303).The following settings are available:◆ Current Access Key, New Access Key, Confirm Access Key: Use these three fields to set or change the access key. The default access key ispassword.IMPORTANT: You will be prompted to modify the access key before you can continue with accessing the web GUI or uploading project files.Note: A valid password should only contain upper-case alphabets, lower-case alphabets, and/or numerals.◆ Show on dashboard: Select this option to show the access key setting on the Dashboard tab.◆ Enable Viewer Access Key: Select this option to request for the access key when uploading projects and Viewers to the ATEN controller or when downloading Viewers to mobile devices. Once enabled, you can also configure this setting from the Dashboard tab.
Setting Description
Activation Key The activation key is a string of letters and numbers used to assign a validity period of accessing the ATEN Control System.To set up a validity period for accessing the ATEN Control System:1. Select Your access to ATEN Control System will expire in and type the number of days.2. Type an activation key. Follow the guidelines below when creating your activation key:Max number of characters: 32Allowed characters: uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and underscoreMax. number of days: 999 days3. Type the activation key again to confirm.4. Click Save. The limit is immediately applied. For example:[IMAGE]Note: Keep the activation key somewhere secure because it cannot be recovered. In case you forget the activation key, press the reset button/switch for 8 seconds to set the ATEN controller to default. This will reset all configuration of the controller to default and remove any projects and Viewers stored on the ATEN controller.To disable the validity period, click Enter Activation Key to type the activation key provided by the system integrator.

Monitor

The Monitor tab allows you to view and enable the monitors that have been configured for Flags and digital input devices in ATEN Configurator. Check the Show on dashboard box to show the Monitor settings on the Dashboard. Click the slide bar next to the monitor you want to enable or use the drop-down menu to select All On or All Off.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Monitor Show on dashboard All Select Name

For more information about creating monitors, see Monitor, page 188.

Network

The Network tab allows you to view and configure the controller's network settings. Select Manually to set a static IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway, or Use DHCP to have the server assign an IP address to the controller.

Note: Make sure to set the ATEN controller's IP address and Default Gateway to the same subnet.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Network Get IP Address • Manually • Use DHCP IP Address 10 8 41 100 Subnet Mask 256 256 253 0 Default Gateway 10 8 41 254 Get DNS Server • Automatically • Manually Preferred DNS Server 10 0 1 7 Alternate DNS Server 10 0 1 8 Save Cancel

Working as a DHCP Server

For VK1200 / VK2200 only, the control box can operate as a DHCP server for automated assigning dynamic IP addresses to all of the LAN devices managed via its Control LAN. To do this, follow the steps below.:

Control LAN Get IP Address Enable DHCP Server IP Address 10.3.41.149 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 10.3.41.254 IP Assigned Range 192.168.0.61 - 192.168.0.254 Lease Time (sec.) 7200

  1. From the Get IP Address drop-down list, select Enable DHCP Server, and optionally change the network settings of the ATEN Control System, namely IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
  2. Next to IP Assigned Range, define the desired range of IP that can be used for assigning IP addresses to the connecting IP devices.
  3. Next to Lease Time, define the amount of time an assigned IP address becomes available for use after the IP device it is previously assigned to has been inactive for.

Connections

The Connections tab allows you to view the connection statuses and IP addresses of licensed devices, ATEN Keypads, and ATEN Expansion Boxes.

GeneralLicensesStorageSystem LogAccess KeyMonitorNetworkConnectionsSchedule
Licensed Devices and Keypads
NameIDIP AddressStatus
#18320N-MIKETN/AN/AOffline
#28060P-CHRISTINEN/AN/AOffline
Expansion Box
NameIDIP AddressStatus

Schedule

The Schedule tab lists scheduled events predefined using the ATEN Configurator. You can use this tab to do the following:

◆ Enable or disable scheduled events.
◆ Enable or disable scheduled days

For details on setting up scheduled events, see Scheduled Events, page 212.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Schedule Event Name Repeat Time OPEN Weekly Sunday [08:00 Monday [08:00 Tuesday [08:00 Wednesday [08:00 Thursday [08:00 Friday [00:00 Saturday [00:00 Sunday [18:00 Monday [18:00 Tuesday [18:00 Wednesday [18:00 Thursday [18:00 Friday [00:00 Saturday [00:00

Security

The Security tab allows you to configure SSL and TSL settings to secure the browsing sessions between your computer and the ATEN controller's web interface.

  • SSL Certificate: To enable SSL encryption on the controller, purchase and obtain an SSL certificate from a trusted certifying authority and click Upload to apply the certificate.
    TLS Support: Each ATEN controller supports TLS 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2 to allow communications with devices supporting different versions of the TLS. If you have any security concerns, disable the Enable TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 setting to only allow communications among devices that support TLS 1.2 and click Save.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Security SSL Certificate System Default Open TLS Support Enable TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 yes

Chapter 4

ATEN Configurator (VK6000)

Overview

The ATEN Configurator (VK6000) is a GUI-based management tool that helps you set up and configure the connected hardware and create control interfaces (Viewer), to be used on control interfaces including mobile devices, ATEN Keypads, ATEN Control Pads and ATEN Touch Panel.

Installing ATEN Configurator

To install the ATEN Configurator software, do the following:

  1. Download ATEN Configurator.

a) Visit the ATEN download page.
http://www.aten.com/global/en/support-and-downloads/downloads/
b) Search for “VK6000”. A list of downloads for VK6000 appear.
c) Click ATEN_configurator_software_x.x.xxx.zip to download.

  1. Open the downloaded zip file and double-click

ATEN_configurator_software_x.x.xxx.exe to run the setup. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for VK6000 The InstallShield Wizard will install VK6000 on your computer. To continue, click Next. < Back Next > Cancel

3. Click Next. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully. Software End User License Agreement You may use our software and services only on the condition that you agree to abide by the following terms. We sincerely recommend that you shall read this Agreement very carefully. BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING OUR SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING ELECTRONICALLY TO THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE I accept the terms of the license agreement I do not accept the terms of the license agreement InstallShield < Back Next > Cancel

4. If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next. Click Print to print the Software End User License Agreement. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files. Install VK6000 to: C:\Program Files\ATEN\VK6000 Change... InstallShield < Back Next > Cancel

  1. To change the destination location, click Change. Click Next to proceed using the default location. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation. Click Install to begin the installation. If you want to review or change any of your installation settings, click Back. Click Cancel to exit the wizard. InstallShield < Back Install Cancel

  1. Click Install. When the process is complete, a confirmation message appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed VK6000. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

  1. Click Finish.

Getting Started Tasks

After you have installed and launched the ATEN Configurator, the main screen (page 90) appears. You will be guided to create and configure a project using the 4 tabs in the Configurator's interface, as illustrated below.

ATEN VK112EU - Getting Started Tasks - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["1. Project"] --> B["2. Device"]
    B --> C["3. Design"]
    C --> D["4. Upload"]

Hint: You can click the tabs to switch among different pages for configuration.

The steps below provides an overview of the getting started tasks.

  1. In the Project tab, do the following.

  2. Provide information about the ATEN controller that you have set up.

  3. (Optional) Provide client information for the specified ATEN controller.

Click Add Controller if you have more than one controller in the environment.

Click Start Project to proceed.

  1. In the Device tab, do the following.

  2. Connect each controller with its managed devices by adding them to the controller's Device Configuration list, enter the connection settings, and specify the physical locations.

  3. (Optional) Add another controller and/or Expansion Box to the project by clicking Add Controller or Expander.
  4. Connect the Expansion Box with its managed devices by adding them to the Expansion Box’s Device Configuration list.

For more details, see Configuring Managed Devices, page 101.

Click Design or the Viewer tab to proceed.

ATEN Configurator - [Untitled Project.vkproj*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Control... Viewer ... Unizon VK2200-ID01 Device Configuration

  1. In the Design tab, do the following.

  2. Create and configure a control interface (Viewer). For more information, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 119.
    ♦ (Optional) Set up scheduled events to automatically carry out specified actions.
    ♦ (Optional) Add additional conditions and actions to buttons using Flags. For details, see Flag, page 186.
    ♦ (Optional) Create a sequence of actions for a button by creating a Macro. For details, see Macro, page 210.

  3. (Optional) Create a Variable for a device setting that is controlled by two or more objects in one control interface. For details, see Variables, page 214.

  4. In the Upload tab, upload this Viewer to the controller. For details, see The Upload Tab, page 237.

Main Screen

Overview

Double-click the Configurator.exe shortcut to open the ATEN Configurator software. The Project page appears:

ATEN Configurator File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload Project Information Name Unified Project Controller Mode Mode Controller Add Console Controller ID ID-1 ATENController Type VK2260 Number of Room(s) 1 Client Information Name Optional Address Optional Phone Optional Note Optional Optionsal Start Project

No.Control Description
1Menu Bar The menu bar contains a group of the Configurator 's main functions by category. For details, see Menu Bar, page 91.
2Project Bar The Project Bar contains four tab and the Ωibrary icon. Each tab relates to a step required to set up the project. Each step and the Ωibrary can be selected by clicking on the bar.
3Interactive Display Panel This is the main work area. The page that appears here reflects the project tab that is selected.
4Ωlibrary The Ωlibrary contains the devices, graphic, flag, macro, and monitor databases. Each section allows you to add custom items or choose from ready made selections.
5Toggle Bar These three icons are used as a toggle to show or hide the right, left and bottom control panel.
6Simulator The Simulator button is used to test the Viewer after it is created in Design. The simulator allows you to tryout the interface as it would work on a mobile device but without actually controlling devices. Use the mouse to click through the page links.

The menu bar contains the Configurator's main functions arranged by category. Refer to the table below to find out what each function does.

Menu Sub-Menu Description
File NewProject Select to create a new project.
Open Project Select to browse andopen a previously saved project.
Restore Project from Controller Downloads a previously backed up project from a controller.
Close Closes the current project and returns to the Project tab.
Save Select to save changes to the current project.
Save as Use this option to save the project as a different name.
Export Viewer to USB (Not supported by ATEN Control Pad)Exports Viewers and an access key to a USB drive. After exporting the data onto a USB drive, plug the USB drive into the Control Box's USB port to upload the Viewer files and the access key. These files can only be read by the Control Box and are not project files that can be opened by the ATEN Configurator software.
Project Report Click to save a PDFfile that contains detailed information about each part of the current project.
Add KNX DeviceImport ETS Project
Add Custom KNX Device
Recent Projects Select to view a list of recent projects that can be clicked on to open.
Exit Select to close the project and exit.
Edit UndoSelect to undo a change when editing a Viewer in Create & Design Viewer.
Redo Select to redo a change when editing a Viewer page in Create & Design Viewer.
Cut/Copy/Paste Select to cut, copy or paste text and objects when editing a Viewer page in Create & Design Viewer. When used to copy and paste a button, both the General and Action properties are copied.
Paste Graphic Only Select to paste a button's image but not its Action properties in Create & Design Viewer.
Delete Select to delete highlighted text and images when editing a page in Create & Design Viewer.
Delete Action Only Select to delete the Action properties of a button in Create & Design Viewer.
Select All / Deselect All Use either option to select or unselect all objects when editing a viewer page in Create & Design Viewer.
Preferences Display ΩanguageUse to select the language for the interface.
SSH Destination Click to choose the location of the executable for the SSH Client software. To execute the program, go to Tools > SSH Client.
Interface Check a box to enable the feature described below:Show Welcome Page: displays the Welcome screen when the ATEN Configurator software opens.Auto Page Creation: automatically creates a Viewer page in Create Viewer & Design, for every hardware device that is configured in Select Device & Configuration.Show Password: displays the characters of the access key in the Edit Access Key dialog box.Automatically check for updates: automatically checks for updates and notify the user when an update is available.
ViewThese options are available from Create Viewer & Design Edit Viewer.
Zoom Zooms the Viewer page to 25%, 50%,75%, 100%, 200% or Fit in Window.Note:A mouse wheel can be used to zoom the Viewer page in or out.
Project Information Select to go to Project Information.
Device Configuration Select to go to Select Device &Configuration.
Viewer Design Select to go to Create Viewer & Design.
Project Upload Select to go to Search & Upload.
Properties Select to show/hide the Propertieswindow when editing a Viewer page.
Align to Grid Select to automatically align objects withthe grid. This places objects in perfectalignment with the grid dots when theyare moved. Use Show Grid to displaythe grid dots. When Align to Grid is notselected, objects can be placedanywhere on the page.
Show Grid Select to display the grid dots on thepage. Use with the Align to Grid optionto set objects in perfect alignment on thepage.
Show Object ID Select to show object ID at the top-rightcorner of each object. An object ID isused to specify an object in someconfiguration.
Object These options are available from Create Viewer & Design Edit Viewer.
Button Adds a button to the Viewerpage.
Text Adds a text box to the Viewerpage.
Image Adds an image to the Viewerpage.
Scroll View Adds a scroll box to theViewer page,then double-click it to add buttons. Use the box as a scroll window to easily access a list of buttons on the page.
Video Adds a video box which allows you to view video. The video box can be resized using the Properties sidebar or by dragging a small box on the boarder to resize it to the desired shape.
Slider Bar Adds a slider bar to theViewer page.Slider bars are used to adjust the value of a device setting, such as the volume level of an audio device.
MenuSub-MenuDescription
Object PowerPoint Control Template Adds a PowerPoint Control template to the Viewer. This control template is used to control PowerPoint files saved in a target computer.
Menu Sub-MenuDescription
Object Align Ωeft Aligns twoor more selectedobjects to the Ωeft side of the object that is selected last.
Center Aligns twoor more selected objects to the horizontal position of the object that is selected last.
Right Aligns two ormore selected objects to the Right side of the object that is selected last.
Top Aligns two ormore selected objects to the Top side of the object that is selected last.
Middle Aligns twoor more selected objects to the vertical position of the object that is selected last.
Bottom Aligns twoor more selected objects to the Bottom side of the object that is selected last.
Make Same SizeWidth Resizes twoor more selected objects to the same width of the object that is selected last.
Height Resizes twoor more selected objects to the same height of the object that is selected last.
Both Resizes twoor more selected objects to the same width and height of the object that is selected last.
Space EvenlyAcross Page WidthSpaces two or more selected objects evenly across the width of the page.
Across Page HeightSpaces two or more selected objects evenly across the height of the page.
Between Objects HorizontallyAdjusts the horizontal space between three or more selected objects to the average distance between each of the selected objects.
Between Objects VerticallyAdjusts the vertical space between three or more selected objects to the average distance between each of the selected objects.
MenuSub-MenuDescription
Tools Database Generator Opens the ATEN DDatabase Generatorwhich is used to manually add andconfigure hardware devices. This iswhere you can create custom devices toadd to My Device Library. See ATENDatabase Generator, page 241, fordetails.
Simulator The Simulator is used totest a Viewer'sinterface after it has been created inDesign. The simulator allows you totryout the interface as it would work on amobile device but without actuallycontrolling devices. Use the mouse toclick through the page links.
SSH Client This runs the SSH Clientsoftwareselected under Edit > Preferences >SSH Destination. The SSH Client isused to communicate with the controller.
WindowsNew Page Click to create a new Viewer page orselect a page to open in Create Viewer& Design.
Help AboutProvides the firmware version andsupport information for the Configuratorsoftware.
Check for Updates Checks if ATENConfigurator is up-to-date.
Training Videos (Basic) Click to see how-to videos on tasksinvolved in configuring a project file.
Training Videos (Advanced) Click to see how-to videos on usingadvanced features such as creating avariable, creating a driver usingdatabase generator, and more.
Driver Downloads Click to download drivers for third-partydevices.
What's NewClick to see new features and functionsin this version.

Creating Projects

The Project tab allows you to enter details about the installation to start the project. Enter the information using the table below as a guide.

ATEN Configurator - [] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Project Information Name Untitled Project Controller Mode ID Moda Controller Add Controller Controller ID ID-1 ATEN Controller Type VK2200 Number of Room(s) 1 Controller ID ID-2 ATEN Controller Type VK1200 Number of Room(s) 1 Remove Controller Controller ID ID-3 ATEN Controller Type VK0200 Number of Room(s) 1 Remove Controller Client Information Name Optional Address Optional Phone Optional Note Optional StartProject

Control Description

Name Enter the project name you are setting up. You can create multiple projects but for most installations only one project is required.

Control Description
Controller Mode Click to specify how controllers in this project file connect to Expansion Boxes and Keypads.
ID Mode (default)Controllers connect to Expansion Boxes or ATEN Keypads by matching controller ID, as set using the controller ID switch on the controller panel and configured in the project file (see Controller ID field below) with the controller ID set on the Expansion Box or Keypad.Using the ID mode, a controller can connect up to 8 Keypads of the same model and 8 Expansion Boxes of the same model.IP ModeControllers connect to Expansion Boxes / ATEN Keypads through their IP address.Note: When IP Mode is selected, controllers do not use any ID settings on ATEN Keypads or Expansion Boxes as the basis for their connection. However, the controller ID on the controller panel and the project file need to match to successfully apply the configuration.Using the IP mode, the maximum numbers of ATEN Expansion Boxes that controllers can connect are as follows:VK0100 / VK0200: 16VK1100A / VK2100A: 32VK1200 / VK2200: 64Using the IP mode, the maximum numbers of ATEN Keypads that controllers can connect are as follows:VK0100 / VK0200: 10VK1100A / VK2100A: 16VK1200 / VK2200: 32
Add Controller Click to add controllers to the project. The number added should match the number of controllers installed. A project can have up to 16 controllers.
Controller ID Displays the controller ID. Make sure the ID in this field matches the ID on the controller so that the project file will be uploaded to the specified controller.
ATEN Controller Type Select the model for the controller.
Number of Rooms Enterthe number of rooms each controller will control. Each hardware device you add will be associated with a room. When buttons are configured in the Design tab, you can select a Room under Button Action to filter the Device list so that only hardware in that room appears. This link between the controller, devices and room is how the Viewer knows which devices to control.
Name Enter the client name associated with the project.
Address Enter the client address associated with the project.
Phone Enter the client phone number associated with the project.
Remove Controller Click to delete a controller from the project.
Start Project Click to begin configuring hardware devices. The Select Device & Configuration tab will open.

Configuring Managed Devices

Overview

The Device tab is used to configure controller ports according to the connected hardware device.

ATEN Configurator - [Untitled Project vproj*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Devices 3 Design 4 Upload Control View Unizn VK2100-ID01 Device Configuration VK2100-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1 I/O 1 None Output Room-1 I/O 2 None Output Room-1 I/O 3 None Output Room-1 I/O 4 None Output Room-1 IR 1 None IR Room-1 IR 2 None IR Room-1 IR 3 None IR Room-1 IR 4 None IR Room-1 Relay 1 None Room-1 Relay 2 None Room-1 Relay 3 None Room-1 Relay 4 None Room-1 Ethernet 1 None Room-1 Add Connection to Emitter Add Room Properties Name Add Device Category Audio Conference Band Model Version Connection Settings Baud Filter: 0608 Data Bit: 8 Stop Bit: 1 Party Name Advanced

Control Description
DeviceConfiguration istThis section lists the ports for each controller, their connected device, connection mode, device location (room) and if the device is managed by UnizonTM. Click on a controller, expansion box or Room in the left sidebar to display the ports. Each port needs to be configured according to the hardware device connected to it. For details, seeLeft Sidebar, page 102.
eft Sidebar Thethe left sidebar provides a tree view of the ATEN Control System deployment in each project. Use the sidebar to add/remove a controller, Expansion Box, or Room.
Properties Thissection allows you to add and configure controllers, Expansion Boxes, managed devices, and rooms. For details, seeConfiguring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 119.
Device ΩlibraryClick this icon to open the Library on the Device Library tab which contains a database of hardware devices that can be added to the Device Configuration list. For details, see Device Library, page 118.

Control... Viewer ... Unizon VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VK236-ID01 VK248-ID01 VK258-ID01 Room-1 VE8950 VE8900 VM0808H Switch VS481A Switch-1 VM1616T B96 VK2200-ID02 Room-2 VE8950-1 B96-1 B96A Add Controller or Expander Add Room

Controller

The Left Sidebar provides a tree view of the controllers, Expansion Boxes, and rooms. Each controller in the tree view represents a controller with one or more rooms it manages. Selecting a controller allows you to configure its ports. When a port is configured for a device, it appears listed under the Room.

Each controller must contain at least one room. When installing multiple controllers in one room, add a room with the same name to each controller.

Each controller name ends with an ID number: e.g. VK2200-ID02. This ID number is automatically generated when the controller is added into the project. You can also configure this ID in the controller properties settings.

Use this number to set the Controller ID Switch on the rear of the controller. This links the controller in the software to the physical device being installed.

Right-click a controller to Add Room or Delete Controller.

Room

Each room is associated with a controller and a Viewer so that the information is uploaded to the correct controller to control the hardware devices. Right click a room to Delete or Rename the room. Use the buttons at the bottom of the sidebar to Add Room.

Expansion Box

ATEN Expansion Boxes connect over a network to add ports to the controller via its Ethernet port. Clicking Add Controller or Expander opens a window which allows you to select a device to add.

Device Configuration List

The Device Configuration page lists the controller ports by type. Click a port to view its Properties. Double-click a port to open the ATEN Device Library and search for the hardware device to configure the port. Configure each port according to the hardware device connected to it.

Device Configuration
VK2100-ID01
Type Device Mode Room Unizon
Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1
I/O 1 None Output Room-1
I/O 2 None Output Room-1
I/O 3 None Output Room-1
I/O 4 None Output Room-1
IR 1 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
IR 2 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
IR 3 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
IR 4 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
Relay 1 None Room-1
Relay 2 None Room-1
Relay 3 None Room-1
Relay 4 None Room-1
Ethernet 1 None Room-1 + Add More Devices
VK224-ID01
Type Device Mode Room Unizon
Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1
VK248-ID01
Type Device Mode Room Unizon
Relay 1 None Room-1
Relay 2 None Room-1
Relay 3 None Room-1
Control Description
Type Ωists theports of the controller.
Device Ωists the device name entered in Properties.
Mode Ωists theport's communication mode. Click an arrow to select options:♦ Serial: RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485♦ I/O: Input (VDC), Input (Dry Contact) or Output♦ IR: IR or R-S232
Room Ωists the room selected for a device. The rooms available depend on the number of rooms added to the controller. No drop-down menu appears if there is only one room. Each controller must have at least one room. Select the room where the device is installed.
UnizonTM Select this option to allow UnizonTM to manage and monitor the corresponding device.Note:Configuration will also be required on UnizonTM for this feature to work. For an overview of how to set up the function, see Centralized Monitoring and Control via UnizonTM, page 229.
+ Add More DevicesRS-422, R-S485, ΩAN and IR ports can cascade additional devices that are connected to the first unit. IR ports can cascade 1 device, RS-422 and RS-485 ports can cascade up to 2 devices and ΩAN ports can cascade up to 25 devices.

Adding Devices to the Device Configuration List

Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator

To add devices that are not KNX compliant, use one of the following methods.

Via ATEN Device Library or My Library

  1. In the Device Configuration list, click a port where you have physically installed a device.

VK2200-ID01 × VK2100-ID02 Device Configuration VK2200-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1

  1. Click library. In the pop-up window, click the drop-down list to select ATEN Device Library or My Device Library, and then double-click an item to add the device. The selected device is added to Device Configuration.

VK2200-ID01 VK2100-ID02 Device Configuration VK2200-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 VM51616H RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 7 None RS232 Room-1

Via the Properties Column

  1. In the Device Configuration list, click a port where you have physically installed a device.

VK2200-ID01 × VK2100-ID02 Device Configuration VK2200-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon ① Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1

  1. Use one of the following to add a device.

- Select from Library:

Use this method to automatically bring in default settings for the selected device.

(a) Click the arrow button and select Add device from the Library to open the Library.

Properties Name Add Device Add device from the Library

(b) Click the drop-down list to select ATEN Device Library or My Device Library, and then double-click an item to add the device.

- Specify and configure settings

Use this method to type and configure each setting for the device. When the configuration is complete, click Add Device.

Properties Name Add Device

Note:

If the device is not in the Library, create the device using Database Generator. For details, see Editing / Adding a New Device, page 248.

ATEN Device Library ATEN Device Library My Device Library Create Device IR Relay Ethernet Version Property Switch Switch Switch V1.0 Output Lift Lift Lift V1.0 Output Screen Screen Screen V1.0 Output

Adding KNX Devices

There are two ways to add KNX devices into ATEN Control System projects:

  • Add a KNX device individually (page 107)
  • Import a pre-configured ETS project (page 108)

Adding a KNX Device

  1. In the Devices tab, go to File > Add KNX Device > Add Custom KNX Device. A KNX IP Interface (with a default room) is added.

1. Project 2. Device 3 Con... Vi... Uniz... KNX IP Interface Default Room VK2200-ID01 VK224111 Room-1 VK1200-ID02 Room-2

  1. On the controller where you wish to add the KNX device, right-click the controller and then select Add KNX Room > Default Room.

The KNX device is added.

Con... Vi... Uniz... KNX IP Interface Default Room VK2200-ID01 VK236 Room-1 VK2200-ID02 VK248 Room-2 Default Room VK1200-ID03 Room-3

Importing an ETS Project

  1. In the Devices tab, go to File > Add KNX Device > Import ETS Project. The configurations for your KNX devices appear in the Controller tab on the left-side bar.
  2. In the Controller tab, click on KNX IP Interface and type its IP address and port in the Properties column.

Device Properties

The Properties panel provides information and configuration fields for controllers, Expansion Boxes, remote devices, or rooms. Click a device or room from the left sidebar or the Device Configuration list to display its properties.

Controller Properties

Properties Name VK2200 Controller ID ID01 Brand ATEN

Click a controller from the left sidebar or from the Device Configuration list to configure or view the following properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.
◆Controller ID: Sets the controller ID. With the controller set to ID mode (Creating Projects, page 98), the controller connects to ATEN Expansion Box and Keypad by matching this ID with that set on the Expansion Box or Keypad.

Expansion Box (Expander)

Click an expansion box from the left sidebar or from the Device Configuration list to configure or view the following properties

Properties Expander Name VK224 Expander ID ID01 Brand ATEN Connection Settings IP Address Optional

◆ Name: Displays the device model.
- Expander ID: Select the expander ID. Make sure the ID matches the one set physically on the Expansion Box.
- IP Address: Specify the IP address of the expansion box. This setting is only required when the connection mode (with the controller) is set to IP mode. For more information, see Creating Projects, page 98.

Serial Device Properties

Properties

ATEN VK112EU - Properties - 1

Name

VM1600

Remove

Category

Video Matrix Switches

Brand

ATEN

Model

VM1600

Version

V1.3.126

ATEN VK112EU - Properties - 2

Connection Settings

Baud Rate

19200

ATEN VK112EU - Connection Settings - 1

Data Bit

ATEN VK112EU - Connection Settings - 2

Stop Bit

ATEN VK112EU - Connection Settings - 3

Parity

None

Advanced

Delay Interval

ATEN VK112EU - Advanced - 1

Seconds

Feedback Timeout

ATEN VK112EU - Advanced - 2

Seconds

End Character

ATEN VK112EU - Advanced - 3

ATEN VK112EU - Advanced - 4

Keep Connection Alive

Format

ATEN VK112EU - Keep Connection Alive - 1

ASCII

ATEN VK112EU - Keep Connection Alive - 2

HEX

Command

ATEN VK112EU - Keep Connection Alive - 3

Interval

1.0

Seconds (1.0\~60.0)

Click a serial device from the Device Configuration list to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.

- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 105.

◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.

- Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.

◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.

◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the drop-down menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 248).

- Connection Settings: Click the drop-down lists to configure the baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity settings, and flow control for the selected serial device.

◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the following settings.

◆Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

◆Feedback Timeout: Sets the maximum interval that the controller allows in between parts of a feedback message. The controller uses this value to identify the end of a message.

  • End Character: Type the end-of-text character of the device to inform controller the end of a message and to shorten the response time.
  • Keep Connection Alive: The controller sends a command to the serial device to maintain the connection and avoid timeout issues.

- Command: Type a command to be sent to the selected device.

- Interval: Type the interval at which the controller sends the command.

I/O Device Properties

Properties Name Switch-1 Remove Category Switch Brand Switch Model Switch Version V1.0 Advanced Delay Interval 0 Seconds

Click an I/O device from the Device Configuration list and select Input (VDC), Input (Dry Contact), or Output to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.
- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 105.
◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.
◆Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.
◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.
◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the dropdown menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a

PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 248).

  • Lower Threshold & Upper Threshold: Set the thresholds according to the hardware device you are connecting and then configure a Monitor (see page 188).
    ◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the Delay Interval setting.

- Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

IR/Relay Device Properties

Properties Name VS481A Remove Category Video Switches Brand ATEN Model VS481A Version V2.0.195 ▼ Advanced Delay Interval 0 Seconds

Click an IR/Relay device from the Device Configuration list to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.
- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 105.
◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.
◆Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.
◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.
◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the drop-down menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be

manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 248).

◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the Delay Interval setting.

- Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

Ethernet Device Properties

Properties

ATEN VK112EU - Properties - 1

Name

ControlAssist

Remove

Category

Tool

Brand

ATEN

Model

ControlAssist

Version

V1.2

ATEN VK112EU - Properties - 2

Connection Settings

Protocol Type

HTTPS

IP Address

10.3.41.121

Port

6277

Username

administrator

Password

********

ATEN VK112EU - Connection Settings - 1

Delay Interval

0

ATEN VK112EU - Connection Settings - 2

Seconds

Click an Ethernet device to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.

- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 105.

◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.

- Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.

◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.

◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the dropdown menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 248).

- Connection Settings

Depending on the selected protocol, some of the following settings may not be required and are not displayed.

  • Protocol Type: Click to select the protocol for the Ethernet device. The ATEN Control System supports control of devices via telnet, ONVIF, TCP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS, and WebSocket. Configure the following fields as required.
    ◆ IP Address: Type to assign a fixed IP address to the Ethernet device.
    ◆ Port: Type to assign a communication port.
  • Username & Password: Type the device's login/access credentials.
  • VE Manager Password: Type the administrator password of the VE Manager to allow the controller to access video sources connected to the video extenders managed by the VE Manager.
  • Auth Type: Sets the authentication type that the device uses.
  • URIPath: Type the part of the WebSocket URI that follows its communication port. For example, if the URI is wss://:31416/Dicentis/API, type Dicentis/API in this field.
    SubProtocol: Type the subprotocol for the Ethernet device. This information shall be available in the device's reference or user manual.
  • WSS: Select to encrypt the WebSocket connection.
  • Edit Additional Info:

◆ ExtHeader: Type the required data for handshake header.
◆ Extension: Type the required data for the Sec-WebSocket-Extensions header field.

  • Edit Login Command: Click to edit the login command.
  • Check Status (ICMP): Select this option to allow the controller to send control messages to receive connection status for this Ethernet device.

Note: To allow the online/offline status to be accessible to Unizon ^™ for remote management, select the Unizon ^™ checkbox that corresponds to the device in the Device Configuration list.

  • Stream: To allow video streaming to the controller via RTSP, select this option and type the streaming IP address, port, and login credentials of the Ethernet device.
    ◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the Delay Interval setting.

- Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

  • Delay after Login (for telnet only): Sets a delay (to allow a connection to be established) before the First and Second Commands are sent to the device.
  • Feedback Timeout: Sets the maximum interval that the controller allows in between parts of a feedback message. The controller uses this value to identify the end of a message.
  • End character: Type the end-of-text character of the device to inform controller the end of a message and to shorten the response time.
  • Send command after connection (for telnet and TCP only): Sends commands to the device after a successful connection has been established.

♦ Format: Sets the command format.
- First Command: Sets the command.
- Second Command: Sets the second command.
- Automatically reconnect if no return message is received: Select this option to continue reconnection attempts when no return message is received from the device.

- Keep Connection Alive (for telnet and TCP only): The controller sends a command to the device to maintain the connection and avoid timeout issues.

◆ Command: Type a command to be sent to the selected device.
- Interval: Type the interval at which the controller sends the command.

Migrating Devices to another Controller

When you migrate a managed device from one controller to another, you can have its configuration duplicated without setting it up again.

To migrate the configuration of a managed device to another controller, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Devices tab.
  2. In the left sidebar, right-click the device you wish to migrate.
  3. In the pop-up menu, select Switch To, and then select the controller, and a port to which you wish to migrate. The device and its configuration is moved immediately.

ATEN VK112EU - Migrating Devices to another Controller - 1

Library

The Project Bar provides the Library option. Use the Device Library tab (shown below) to configure controller ports according to the connected hardware devices. The Device Library provides an extensive database of hardware devices that can be double-clicked or drag and dropped into the Device Configuration page to configure controller ports. The Device Library is discussed on the next page.

ATEN Device Library All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Property ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808H V2.2.219 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808 V1.1.106 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404H V2.2.213 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404 V1.0.062 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1616T V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808T V1.2.118 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1600 V1.3.126 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5404H V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5808H V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM6404H V1.1.108 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5404D V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5808D V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM3404H V2.0.192 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM3909H V2.0.192 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808HA V1.0.068 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM51616H V1.0.078 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM6809H V1.0.067 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808HB V1.0.073 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VP2730 1 Add To Project More device drivers

ATEN VK112EU - Library - 2

Device Library

The Device Library tab is a database of hardware devices that instantly configure controller ports. Search the library for the device connected to a controller port then add it to configure the port. For devices not in the library, use the ATEN Database Generator to create custom hardware (see page 241). Click Library on the Project bar or double-click a port on the Device Configuration page to open the ATEN Device Library.

ATEN Device Library All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Property ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808H V2.2.219 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808 V1.1.106 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404H V2.2.213 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404 V1.0.062 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1616T V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808T V1.2.118 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1600 V1.3.126 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5404H V2.0.194 TELNET

ATEN VK112EU - Device Library - 2

  • Add a device by clicking Add to Project or by drag & drop.
  • To search for a device type keywords into the box and click
  • Click a tab to filter by All, Serial, DO, IR, Relay or Ethernet.
  • Click headings to sort by Brand, Device Type, Model or Version.
    ◆ Use the drop-down menu to select:

♦ ATEN Device Library – ATEN’s database of hardware devices.
- My Device Library – Devices added from the Database Generator.
- Create Device – Opens the Database Generator to create custom hardware devices for My Device Library (page 242).

Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer)

This section provides information on how to configure a control interface, the viewer, for your control system and the functions of different control objects.

Getting Started with Configuring Viewers

StepAction Refer to
1.Understand the usages of Pages and Subpages.The Design Tab, page 120
2.Plan and consider the following before creating the viewer:required control actions and suitable control elementsplacement of these control elements among Pages, and on Subpages if neededControl Object Properties, page 137Viewer List, page 121
3.Create a viewer. Adding Viewers, page125
4.Based on your planning, add the required Pages / Subpages.Adding / Removing a Page, page 129Configuring a Subpage, page 130
5.Add and configure control objects on the created Pages / Subpages.Configuring Control Objects, page 134

The Design Tab

Use the Design tab to configure viewers for your control system. A design tab contains following elements to help you create, configure, and manage your viewers:

② Control / Monitor List
Viewer List 3 Configuration Panel 4 Library 5 Simulator ATEN Configurator - [Untitled Project\viprio*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload Viewer1 Control Viewer Unizon Viewer 1 Page Home Page Subpage Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Metro) Display(Multi) Display(Multi1) Display(Multi2) Display(Multi3) Display(Multi4) Display(Multi5) Lighting Projector SubPage12 Page Overview Duplicate Edit Preferences Page Home Page Subpage Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Metro) Display(Multi) Display(Multi1) Display(Multi2) Display(Multi3)

1 Viewer List

The Viewer ist provides a tree view of added Viewers and the associated control pages, as illustrated on the right.

ATEN VK112EU - Viewer List - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Viewer1"] --> B["Page"]
    B --> C["Home Page"]
    B --> D["Page1"]
    E["Subpage"] --> F["Camera"]
    E --> G["Display(Matrix)"]
    E --> H["Display(Mirror)"]
    E --> I["Lighting"]
    E --> J["Projector"]
    E --> K["SubPage12"]

In a Viewer, you may find the following page types:

Home Page: This is the main page (for mobile devices and ATEN touch panel) or the key layout (for ATEN Control Pads and Keypads). A Home Page typically contains buttons that redirect to frequently used features and control pages, such as display, lighting, air conditioning, etc.

ATEN 604 Main Meeting Room Exit 20648 Discuss Present Remote Conference Scene Display Camera Light AirCon Setting

Page: This is a full-size control page to which you can redirect by tapping an associated button or icon from the Home Page or other Pages.

Subpage: A Subpage is a reduced-size control page that is embedded within a Home Page or Page through an adjustable frame (the green frame as illustrated below), called the iFrame. The advantage of using subpages is that it allows you to retain some elements of the page, such as buttons of a menu bar or a company logo, while switching among different subpages. In the example below, this page is designed to have a menu bar on the left and a reserved area (iFrame) for displaying three subpages that can be switched to by tapping the menu options on the left.

menu bar iFrame a subpage showing lighting controls COMPANY LOGO HERE Lighting Projector Display Date On Off Power On Off Blue On Off Display On Off Power 25 % 25 % All On All On

Use Viewer ist to add, remove, or edit Viewers and the associated pages. More specifically, you can use the Viewer ist to do the following tasks:

◆ To add a new Viewer, click the Add Viewer button.
- To add a new Page or Subpage, click the corresponding button at the bottom.
◆ To delete, rename, or copy an added page, right-click it from the list.
- To duplicate the visual design of a control page (without its configurations), right-click it to select Copy, and right-click the target Page or Subpage category and select Paste.

  • To open a control page, click the Page or Subpage from the Viewer list, the Page / Subpage appears as a separate tab in the configuration panel.
  • To see a thumbnail of the added control pages within a Viewer, click a Viewer from the list. This Viewer appears as a tab in the configuration panel. For example:

Viewer1 Page Overview Options EditPolicies Page Home Page Subpage Camera DisplayMatrix DisplayMenu DisplayMulti DisplayMulti Lighting Projector

② Monitor / Control List

The monitor / control list shows the functions and settings monitored or controlled by ATEN Unizon™, categorized by device type. For more information about remote management via ATEN Unizon™, see Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon™, page 229.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Control... Viewer ... Unizon Unizon -- Scenario -- Video Matrix Switch -- Video Switch -- Lift -- KVM Switch -- Screen -- Audio Processor -- Curtain -- Networked AV Scenario Scenario Room Add Function Item Room-1

3 Configuration Panel

The configuration panel is where the Viewer overview and control pages open in tabs for configuration.

4 Library

The Ωlibrary is a repository of built-in and user-created features and functions, including graphics (page 183), flags (page 186), monitoring events (page 188), macros (page 210), schedules (page 212), and variables (page 214). For an overview of these functions, see Library, page 182.

5 Simulator

Use the Simulator button to simulate the control elements on your Viewer (without actual effect on controller-managed devices). Use the mouse to click through the page links.

Note: To view how Subpages appear, click the iFrame of the Subpage and select the Subpage you want to preview for the Preview Subpage setting. Your configuration for the selected Subpage appears.

Properties Mode Normal Name Font Arial 20 pt B r U iFrame Preview Subpage Select a sub Select a subpag Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Mirror) Display(Multi4) Lighting Projector SubPage12 Y 112 Height 1392

Adding Viewers

Deciding How Many & What Viewer to Create

Scenario 1

If you have 4 control devices in your project—one ATEN Control Pad, two ATEN Keypads (sharing identical key layout and control functions with each other, but different with the Control Pad), and an iPad, you will need to create 3 viewers, as illustrated on the right.

ATEN VK112EU - Scenario 1 - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Keypad"] --> B["Page"]
    B --> C["Home Page"]
    D["Control Pad"] --> E["Page"]
    E --> F["Home Page"]
    G["iPad"] --> H["Page"]
    H --> I["Home Page"]
    H --> J["Page1"]
    H --> K["Subpage"]

Scenario 2

If you have 3 control devices in your project – one ATEN Control Pad and two ATEN Keypads (sharing identical key layout and control functions with each other and with the Control Pad), you will need to:

◆ create one viewer for Control Pad
- enable the Connect Keypad setting and specify the associated Keypads. This way, the two Keypads will share the layout and control functions specified in this Viewer.

Viewer Settings Select control device and Viewer Mobile Device Keypad Control Pad Touch Panel Model VK0200 Number of Keys 12 Keys Layout Type 1 Controller ID VK0200HD02 Keypad ID ✓ Connect Keypad VK112EUHD01 VK112ELHD02 Add Keypad ATEN

Configuring a Viewer

  1. In the target project file, go to the Design tab. The Viewer Settings page appears. If not, click Add Viewer from the Viewer Ωist.
  2. Select the physical device for the Viewer.

Viewer Settings Select control device and Viewer Mobile Device Keypad Control Pad Touch Panel Type Pad Resolution 2160 x 1620 Display Aspect Ratio 4:3 Done

3. Configure the settings for your selected device.

Mobile Device

Setting Description
Type Use this drop-down menu to select the mobile device that will be used to control hardware devices in a room. This sets the resolution for the Viewer to fit on the mobile device's screen.Choose a Custom selection to configure a screen size with the Resolution drop-down menu below it.Note: If you select Custom Windows Device – the Windows OS has a limitation for adding buttons to Viewers used on Windows mobile devices. See Windows OS Button Limitation, page 359, for details.
Resolution Use thisdrop-down menu to set a custom screen resolution for the mobile device being used to control hardware devices. This option becomes available when you select one of the Custom selections from the Type drop-down menu.
Display Aspect RatioIndicates the aspect ratio used for the selected device.

♦ Keypad

Setting Description
Model Specify the Keypad model.
Number of Keys Spspecify the total number of keys for your Keypad.
Ωayout Specify theKeypad layout. This setting should match the physical Keypad layout (see page 59 for details). Depending on the total number of keys the Keypad has, you may have 1 or multiple options for this setting.
Controller ID Selectthe ID number of the controller to which the Keypad will connect. This ID must match the controller ID set on the Keypad (see Hardware Overview, page 56).
Keypad ID Select the Keypad, distinguished by its ID number to match the Keypad ID set on the Keypad (see page 63). Up to 8 Keypads can connect to one controller.
blank field(after Keypad ID)For controller to connect to the Keypad through the Keypad's IP address, make sure the controller mode setting (in the Project tab) is set to IP mode, and type the IP address of the Keypad in this field.
Add Keypad ClickAdd Keypad to add one or more Keypads that will connect to the same controller and share identical key layout and control functions.
  • Control Pad
Setting Description
Model Specify themodel for the Control Pad.
Number of KeysSpecify the total number of keys for your Control Pad.
Ωlayout Specify thelayout for the Control Pad. This setting should match the physical layout (see page 59 for details). Depending on the total number of keys the Control Pad has, you may have 1 or multiple options for this setting.
Controller ID Specify the ID of the Control Pad.
Connect Keypad SSelect this option if the connected Keypad(s) share identical key layout and control functions with the Control Pad.
Keypad ID Click the drop-down menu to specify the ID of the added Keypad.
blank field(after Keypad ID)(Optional) Type the IP address of the Keypad for the controller to identify and establish connection with. Use this feature when you have more than 16 Keypads in the project or when the network switch blocks multicast signals between the Keypad and the controller.
Add Keypad Click this button to add Keypad that connects to this Control Pad and shares identical key layout and control functions.

◆ Touch Panel

Setting Description
Type Use this drop-down menu to select the Touch Panel that will be used to control hardware devices in a room.
Resolution Indicates the screen resolution of the selected Touch Panel.
Display Aspect RatioIndicates the aspect ratio of the selected device.

4. Click Done to save the configuration. An overview appears.

File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Controller Viewer Unizon Viewer1 Page Home Page Subpage Add Viewer Add Page Add Subpage Viewer1 Page Overview Duplicate Edit Preferences Page Home Page Subpage

  1. Add or remove the Pages / Subpages to your viewer as required.

Adding / Removing a Page

- To add a Page to a viewer, click from the Viewer list or from the viewer's Page Overview.

ATEN VK112EU - Adding / Removing a Page - 1

- To remove a Page, do any of the following.

◆ In the viewer list, right-click the Page and select Delete.
- In Page Overview, click for the associated Page to be removed.

Display(Matrix) Matrix Display Show Matrix Display A Display B Display C No Save No Save Show Matrix

Configuring a Subpage

  1. Click the target viewer from the Viewer List, and then click add one or more Subpages to the selected viewer.

to Add Subpage

  1. Make sure the Page contains an iFrame for displaying Subpage controls. If not, right-click within the Page and select Add iFrame. A green frame (iFrame) appears.

Page2 X 503

  1. Preview a Subpage within the iFrame.

a) Click within the iFrame. The iFrame border turns blue.

ATEN VK112EU - Configuring a Subpage - 2

natural_image Pure geometric diagram with a rectangle and diagonal lines on a dark blue background, no text or symbols present.

b) Go to Properties > Preview Subpage, and select a Subpage that you have created. The Subpage appears in the selected iFrame.

  1. Adjust the size and location of the iFrame.

  2. To move the iFrame, mouse over within the iFrame and then click-and-drag the iFrame.

  3. To resize the iFrame, click within the iFrame, and drag-and-drop the sides or any of the corners to resize.

  4. If you have two or more Subpages sharing an iFrame, create a button for switching to each of the Subpages.

a) Right-click within the page and select Add Button.
b) Configure the button properties as required.

c) Click the button, click Link Subpage, and then double-click a Subpage from the Function column to add the action. For example:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM0808H(Serial) VS0801A(Serial) CS1944DP(Serial) RX-V659[XM](IR) Curtain(Relay) Condition Link Link SubPage Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Mirror) Display(Mult 1) Display(Mult 2) Display(Mult 3) Display(Mult 4) Display(Mult 5) Lighting Projector SubPage12 3 Commands Link To: Camera to iFrame_1

d) Proceed to configure each button. Now the control page should contain buttons that switch to the defined Subpage.

For example:

COMPANY LOGO HERE Camera Lighting Display (matrix) Projector Display Camera Press Zoom Camera Settings

  1. If you wish to keep a set of controls on the Page and only have them shown when the iFrame is closed, follow the steps below to add and configure a button for this purpose.

a) Right-click within the page and select Add Button.
b) Configure the button properties as required.
c) Click the button in the preview area, and add a Link Subpage action of any Subpage.
d) Double-click the added command and select Hide and the iFrame to be hid.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB-Sensor(Serial) Link Link SubPage Change Button State Change Label Function Display(Multi2) Display(Multi1) Commands - Link To Hide To:iFrame_4096

Note: The iFrame ID should match the ID indicated at the top-right corner of the iFrame in the preview area.

Duplicating a Viewer

To duplicate the Viewer along with its Pages / Subpages, do the following.

  1. Click the target viewer from the viewer list. The page overview appears.

  2. Click . The selected viewer is duplicated.

Viewer Control Objects

Understanding Control Objects

The ATEN control system supports a wide range of control objects, such as buttons, slider bars, videos, and PowerPoint controls that you can use and customize.

Each button has a symbol in the top left corner to indicate:

◆ “A” the button’s actions are configured correctly.
- “!” the button’s actions need to be modified or they will not work.
- Buttons with no symbol indicate that functions have not been added to it. For details on adding functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158.

ATEN VK112EU - Understanding Control Objects - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["PRESENTATION"] --> B["PRODUCTION"]
    B --> C["VIDEO WALL"]
    C --> D["BLIND"]
    D --> E["PROJECTOR"]
    E --> F["CAMERA"]

Each object is identified by an ID at the top right corner. These IDs are assigned in the order of creation. These IDs help identify a label when configuring a Change Label (page 176) or a button when configuring a Change Button State (page 175).

Configuring Control Objects

  1. Use one of the following methods to open the Page you wish to configure.

  2. Click the Page from the Viewer Ωist.

  3. Click its associated Viewer from the Viewer ist to open the Page overview and then click to open the Page.

The Page opens in a tab. For example:

Home Page ATEN Remote PC Control with ATEN ControlAssist PC Control Apps CUSTOM

  1. To add a control object, right-click any space in the Page, and select an object from the pop-up menu.

Note:

  • For detailed information of each object type, see Control Object Properties, page 137.
  • The Windows OS has a limitation when adding buttons to Viewer pages for use on Windows mobile devices. See Windows OS Button Limitation, page 359, for details.

  • Click the added object to configure its settings and/or associated actions.

ATEN Configurator - V2.0.vkproj* File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload View3 Home Page View1 PowerPoint Properties View3 Remote PC Control with ATEN ControlAssist PC Control Apps Mode Normal System: Entry Image Name: Font Times New Roman 48.x B J M Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency Position & Size Position X Y 590 127 Size Width Height 146 145 Panel Image Size Restrict access to this button or ATEN Control System App with a password Button Action Device Room-1 Function Commands V2.00-D01 Delay VK224-D01 Relay ControlAssist(LAN) OO vm(LAN) Wake on Last Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Textset Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(-EX)

Element Tasks

Configuration panel

Shows a preview of the selected Page. You can also do the following on the preview panel:

  • To zoom in and out on the preview, scroll the mouse wheel.
  • To relocate an object, drag and drop the object.
  • To layer an object, right-click the object and set the Order options.
  • To group multiple objects, drag the mouse to select the objects, right-click on any of the objects and select Group.
  • To align object, drag the mouse to select the objects, right-click on any of the objects and select Align.
  • To set objects in perfect alignment, use the View menu options to select Show Grid and Align to Grid.
Element Tasks
Properties panelUse the panel to configure selected object properties. For detailed information about object properties, refer to the following sections:Note: The iFrame ID should match the ID indicated at the top-right corner of the iFrame in the preview area., page 132Object Properties for ATEN Keypad / Control Pad, page 155
LibraryUse Ωlibrary to customize the appearance of the page and its buttons. For more information, see Library, page 117.
Button Action or Slider Bar ActionUse this panel to define the functions of each button and slider bar. For detailed information, see Button /Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158.
Advanced functionsTo add additional conditions and actions to buttons, use the Flag function. For more information, see Flag, page 186.For a button to initiate a sequence of actions, create a Macro. For more information, see Macro, page 210.

Control Object Properties

Buttons

The Button properties provide options to configure the appearance of a button, and the confirmation message and progress message before carrying out the associated action.

Properties Mode Normal Appearance Dialog Message Name Font Times New Roman 48 pt B I U Style Image Normal Press Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 366 127 Size Width Height 140 140 Reset Image Size

- Alignment – Aligns a group of objects. Select multiple objects for the buttons to become available:

Properties

♦ Mode

Use this drop-down menu to select one of the following button types.

  • Normal – This is a button that stays the same when pressed.
  • Toggle – for a button that switches between two images/colors to indicate the button status. This also splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 158) – to provide two commands for the button: Toggle ON and Toggle OFF.
  • Press and Release – for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 158) to provide two commands for the button: Press and Release.
  • Long Press for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This button continuously re-sends a command to a device as long as it is pressed, at the Interval specified (see Interval, below) and stops sending the command once the button is released.

Note: Use the Normal or Long Press option to set the image/color of the button based on its status.

◆ Appearance

Click the Appearance tab to configure the look of the button.

Note: The Appearance settings are applicable to all button modes. However, the Appearance tab only exists for Normal and Toggle buttons to categorize different sets of settings.

  • Name – (optional) type the text you want to use for the button (or slow double-click the button on the Viewer page).
  • Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font type.

- Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.

- Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text for the button.

- Format – formats text to Bold, Italic or Underline for the button.

- Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the button box.

- Style – use the drop-down menu to select the style type.

- Image – Select this option from the drop-down menu and click Normal and Pressed to import an image to use as the button’s standard background and when the button is pressed.

- Color – Select this option from the drop-down menu to use color blocks for the toggle button and configure the colors for the normal and pressed status.

- Transparency – enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the button.

- Send Command Every (Long Press mode buttons only) – use the drop-down menu to select the amount of time between each command that is sent (repeatedly) to the device while the button is pressed.

- Position and Size – X and Y position the button at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the button box. Click Reset Image Size to reset the button size.

- Reset Image Size – click to reset the button size.

- Set Sync Condition – automatically synchronizes the button setting to the selected variable. To create variables, see Variables, page 214.

- Use as status indicator – This option is only applicable to toggle buttons accessed from a Windows-based Viewer. Select this option to disable the control functioning of the toggle button and use it as a status indicator, which changes its appearance as defined by the Style settings.

- Execute first (only applicable to normal-mode buttons) – Select this option for the button to automatically initiate its actions (commands) when its located page opens.

- Restrict access to this button on ATEN Control System App with a password– Limit the use of the selected button by requesting a password when the button is tapped in the Viewer. To enable this function, click this option and type the password in the box below.

Note:

- This function is only supported by the Normal and Toggle mode buttons (page 138).

- A valid password should not start or end with a space and should only contain upper-case alphabets, lower-case alphabets, numerals, and/or special characters including ()\~:-_

♦ Dialog

Click the Dialog tab to set up a confirmation message that displays in the Viewer when the button is pressed.

Note: The Dialog settings are only available for Normal and Toggle buttons.

  • Confirm the associated action with the following message when the button is pressed – Click the check box to enable this feature.
    Action – Select a button action (Toggle On or Toggle Off) to display the confirmation message.
  • Content drop-down list – Select one of the following for customization.

  • Background – Customize the wording for the confirmation message. Type the message in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.

  • OK – Customize the wording on the button for carrying out the associated action. Type in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.
  • Cancel – Customize the wording on the button for canceling the associated action. Type in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.

- Message

Click the Message tab to set up a progress message that displays while the associated action is being carried out.

Note: The Message settings are only available for Normal and Toggle buttons.

  • Confirm the associated action with the following message when the button is pressed – Click the check box to enable this feature.
    Action – Select a button action (Toggle On or Toggle Off) for displaying the progress message.
  • Content drop-down list – Select one of the following for customization.

  • Background – Configure the wording for the progress message. Type the message in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.

  • Progress Bar – Configure the display duration (in seconds), font, and color of the progress indicator.

Groups

You can unify the properties of two or more control objects (buttons, slider bars, etc.) at the same time. Depending on the elements that your group of objects have, different properties will be open for configuration. Use your mouse to drag and select the objects from a page, the properties that are open for configuration appear in the Properties column.

For example, if you want to unify the text that appear on multiple buttons, drag and select these buttons and then configure their properties, as illustrated below.

Home Page Media Link Page PowerPoint to Home Page to PowerPoint to Media Properties Name Font Arial 24 pt Position & Size Position X Y 0 0 Size Width Height 40 40 Reset Image Size Group Group Radio Group

Labels

Properties Mode Normal Name Label Font Times New Roman 51 pt B I U Style Image Border/Li Width 10 Position & Size Position X Y 114 498 Size Width Height 422 105 Reset Image Size Set Sync Condition

The Label properties provide settings for the displayed text and its format.

- Alignment – Aligns a group of objects. Select multiple objects for the buttons to become available:

Properties

  • Name – enter the text you want to use for the label or slow double-click the label on the Edit page.
  • Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font type.
  • Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.
    ◆Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text.
  • Format– format text to Bold, Italic or Underline.
  • Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the label box.
  • Border/Line – select this option to configure the color, format, and width of the display screen border.

- Position and Size – X and Y position the label at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the label.

- Set Sync Condition – Displays the value of the selected variable in percentage or its raw form. To create variables, see Variables, page 214.

Slider Bars

Properties Mode Basic Slider Bar Name Font Arial 20 pt B T U Direction Vertical Horizontal Style Foreground Color Background Color Knob Transparency 0 Value ASCII HEX Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Level 11 The change value will be averaged by calculating: (Maximum Value - Minimum Value) / Levels Position & Size Position X Y 14 14 Size Width Height 400 25 Reset Image Size Set Sync Condition

Right click on a Viewer page and select Slider Bar to add a bar. A Slider Bar can control a device, link to another page, or run a macro.

Use the Mode drop-down menu to select the type of slider bar (Basic Slider Bar or Advanced Slider Bar).

Basic Slider Bar

◆A slider bar where you enter the minimum and maximum values to calculate the range and levels on a slider bar, and then add one command to configure the Basic Slider Bar’s action (See Slider Value, page 164). Choose options under Value to configure the slider bar’s range.
- Direction – sets the bearing of the slider bar.
- Style – click the drop-down menus to select the Foreground Color and Background Color for the slider bar.
- Value – Sets the total number of levels for the slider bar.
- ASCII / HEX – click a radio button to select the format for the slider bar values.
- Minimum – enter the lowest level on the bar.
♦Maximum – enter the highest level on the bar.
- Level – this represents the number of levels on the slider bar. You can calculate the value of each level with the formula: Maximum Value - Minimum Value / Level = Value Per Level. The Level is automatically calculated according to the Minimum and Maximum values you enter.
♦ Position and Size – depending on whether the bar is set Vertical or

Horizontal you can use either the Size: Width or Height box to enter a number to resize the length of the slider bar.

- Set Sync Condition – Automatically synchronizes the slider bar to the selected variable. To create a variable, see Variables, page 214.

Advanced Slider Bar

  • A slider bar where you set the number of levels and add a command for each level in the bar (see Level, in the table, on page 158). Choose options under Value to configure the slider bar's range:
  • Direction – sets the bearing of the slider bar.
  • Style – click the drop-down menus to select the Foreground Color and Background Color for the slider bar.
  • Value – Sets the total number of levels for the slider bar.Level – this represents the number of levels on the slider bar. For each level you must add a separate command in the Slider Bar Action – Commands list (see Level, in the table, on page 158).

PowerPoint Control and Media Control Templates

Properties Mode Normal Name Font Arial 10 pt B I U Style Image Normal Press Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 441 15 Size Width Height 216 166 Reset Image Size Select Device ControlAssist

Click a PowerPoint control template or a media control template to configure its position, size, and the PC that controls it.

  • Position and Size - X and Y position the label at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the label.
  • Select Device – Select the PC that stores the PowerPoint or media files using the drop-down list.

Images

The Properties for an image provide options to change and import images to the page. Images can be layered with other objects so that they can be placed as a background or as highlights for buttons (see Layering Images, page 147). You can Group, Order, Align, Make Same Size or Space Evenly from the Object menu.

Note: For imported images, make sure the file names contain English alphabets and/or numerals only.

Properties Mode Normal Name Font Arial 20 pt B T U Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 394 290 Size Width Height 304 281 Reset Image Size

-Style – shows the image selected. Click inside the box to import an image (*.png,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.bmp) to the page.
- Transparency – enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the image selected.
♦ Position and Size – X and Y position the image at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the image.
- Reset Image Size – resets the image size.

Layering Images

Images can be layered with other objects, such as labels and buttons, so that they can be placed as a background or as highlight for the page and/or other objects.

Video Call Conference Call Presentation Music Video Atmosphere Image Button Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Device 4 Device 5 More

Videos

A video object is a control used for video preview, video assignment on managed displays, or video streaming by RTSP. For more details of each, see the corresponding section below:

♦ Video previews: See Setting Up a Video Preview Window, page 148.
♦ Video assignment: See Setting Up a Video Control Window, page 148.
♦ Video streaming: See Setting Up a Video Streaming Window, page 151.

Setting Up a Video Preview Window

You can set up video preview windows to view video sources from ONVIF-compliant cameras managed by the controller.

  1. In your project file, make sure you have added ONVIF-compliant cameras as Ethernet devices in the Device Configuration list.
  2. Right-click a viewer page and select Add Video.
  3. Click the added video object and configure the following properties.

♦ Mode: Select ONVIF.
♦ Position & Size: Configure these settings as required.
- Select Device: Select the added ONVIF-compliant camera.

Setting Up a Video Control Window

Video control windows are objects on the Viewer which allow you to see previews of video sources (on a source object) or the assigned video sources (on a display object), and to switch video sources by tapping or dragging and dropping actions from the Viewer. Note that video control window is only applicable to ATEN networked video extenders.

For example, the following Viewer contains 8 video control objects, the top 3 are video source objects, each show a preview of its connected video source, and the bottom 5 are display objects, each showing its assigned video source.

ATEN Control System

To switch a video source on a display, tap a source object and then tap a display object. The switch takes effect immediately. Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop a source object onto a display object if you have this control action enabled.

To set up a video control object, follow the steps below.

  1. In Configurator, you are advised to add at least one video transmitter as Ethernet device (to the Device Configuration list) for every 4 video control objects to use the as a gateway to obtain previews.

Important:

♦ Videos can only be transmitted via video transmitters to the controller.
◆ To ensure preview quality:

- Add at least one video transmitter (to the Device Configuration list) for every 4 video control objects. Adding more video control objects will likely reduce the refresh rate and smoothness of the preview.

  • Avoid concurrent viewing from more than one user via the Control System App.
  • Use the VE89 control app to preview video walls.

- To ensure stable preview delivery, it is recommended to use the windows version of the Control System App for prolonged viewing or monitoring. Prolonged viewing on iOS platforms may result in automatic termination of the process due to the platform’s protection mechanism to ensure its normal functioning.

  1. Right-click a Viewer page and select Add Video.
  2. Click the added object and configure its properties.

◆ Mode: Select VE89 Series.
- Position & Size: Configure these fields as required.
- Select Device: Select a video transmitter as the gateway for obtaining a preview of what is displayed on the specified extender (as configured for Port and ID).

Important: Only connect up to 4 control objects to one device.

  • Port: Select the device type. Select Transmitter for a source object and Receiver for a display object,
    ID: Type the device ID for the specific transmitter or receiver. Allow drag-and-drop: Select this option to allow drag-and-drop controls.

4. Click the added object and configure the action.

For example:

(a) Create a variable to store the video source on a source object.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VS481A(IR) Switch-1(Relay) Switch(IO) VE8950(LAN) VE8900(LAN) B96(LAN) Macro Timer Set Variable 2 Function Switch Tx * * to Rx * Switch Rx * off* Switch VideoWall *(layout*) Switch VideoWall *(layout*) EDID Tx** Reset Tx * Reset Rx * Get Device Status Get Resource * List Blankscreen Rx **

(b) Add the switching action on a display object.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VS481A(IR) Switch-1(Relay) Switch(IO) VE8950(LAN) VE8900(LAN) B96(LAN) Macro Timer Set Variable Set Flag 2 Function Switch Tx ** to Rx* Switch Rx ^ off^ Switch VideoWall ^ (layout*) Switch VideoWall ^ (layout*) EDID Tx** Reset Tx* Reset Rx* Get Device Status Get Resource * List Blankscreen Rx** Blankscreen VideoWall **

For more information about creating actions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158.

Note: To ensure smoothness of video transmission, prevent accessing this Viewer page from two or more devices at the same time.

Setting Up a Video Streaming Window

You can set up a window to stream video content via RTSP.

  1. In your project file, make sure you have added an RTSP-compliant device and configured the Stream settings.
  2. In a Viewer page, right-click in the blank space and select Add Video.
  3. Click the added video object, and configure its properties as follows.

♦ Mode: Select RTSP.
- Position & Size: (Optional) Specify the position and size as required. Alternatively, drag any of the object corners for resizing; mouse over the object to drag-and-drop it to reposition within the Viewer page.
- Select Device: Select the added Ethernet device.
- RTSP Settings

Default: Select this option to use the typical format for the RTSP URL (rtsp://username: password@ip:port). Type the RTSP URL of the device in the blank below.
- Custom: Select this option to use a different RTSP URL format. Type the URL in the blank below.

Dial Kit

A dial kit template consists of a display screen and a set of dial keys. To configure their appearance, click on the display area or a key.

Display Screen Dial Keys

Properties for Display Screen
Properties Mode Font Arial 51 pt B I U Style Image Border/Li Width 2 Position & Size Position X Y 1120 360 Size Width Height 486 117

Properties for Dial Key
Properties Mode Name Font Arial 74 pt B I U Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 1465 511 Size Width Height 141 116

- Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font for the typed text.

  • Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.
  • Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text for the button.
  • Format – formats text to Bold, Italic or Underline for the button.
  • Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the button box.

- Style – use the drop-down menu to select the style type.

Note: The image and color settings are only applicable to dial keys.

  • Image – select this option to import different images for the dial key when it is pressed and not pressed (normal).
  • Transparency—enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the button.
  • Color – select this option to use different color blocks to indicate a pressed and a normal dial key.
  • Border/Line – select this option to configure the color, format, and width of the display screen border.

- Position and Size – X and Y position the button at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the button box. Click Reset Image Size to reset the button size.

Note: If you are using the Call 📋 and End Call 🌐 dials, click the dial key to configure its action. For a detailed procedure, see Example: Configuring actions of dial keys., page 165.

Frame & Line

Use frames and lines to visually group or separate control objects in your Viewer. Click a frame or line object to configure its properties.

Frame Properties Properties Mode Name Font Times New Roman 51 pt B I U Style Image Round Corner 38 Fill Transparency Border/Li Width 10 Position & Size Position X Y 300 608 Size Width Height 422 423 Reset Image Size Line Properties Properties Mode Name Font Times New Roman 51 pt B I U Style Image Round Corner 53 Fill Transparency Border/Li Width 10 Position & Size Position X Y 499 365 Size Width Height 400 0 Reset Image Size

  • Style – configure the color, format, and width of the line or border of the frame.
  • Rounder corder – use the scroll bar or the number box to configure the roundness of the frame corner.
    ◆ Fill – select this option to fill the frame with the selected color.
  • Position and Size – X and Y position the frame/line at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the frame/line.

Object Properties for ATEN Keypad / Control Pad

After you have added a Viewer (page 125) for your Keypad / Control, you can start configuring the Viewer. In the Viewer page, click on a button to configure its settings. The following settings appear in the Properties panel.

Properties Mode ▼ Normal Name Font Times New Roman 40 pt B I U Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Send Command After Holding 0.0 Seconds Position & Size Position X Y 404 286 Size Width Height 204 184 Reset Image Size

♦ Mode

Use this drop-down menu to select one of the following button types.

  • Normal – This is a button that stays the same when pressed.
  • Toggle – for a button that switches between two images/colors to indicate the button status. This also splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 158) – to provide two commands for the button: Toggle ON and Toggle OFF.
  • Press and Release – for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 158) to provide two commands for the button: Press and Release.
  • Long Press for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This button continuously re-sends a command to a device as long as it is pressed, at the Interval specified (see Interval, below) and stops sending the command once the button is released.

Note: Use the Normal or Long Press option to set the image/color of the button based on its status.

  • Name – (optional) type the text you want to use for the button (or slow double-click the button on the Viewer page).
  • Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font type.

  • Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.

  • Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text for the button.
  • Format – formats text to Bold, Italic or Underline for the button.
  • Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the button box.

- Style – use the drop-down menu to select the style type.

  • Image – imports an image to use as the button’s standard background and click Pressed to import an image to use when the button is pressed.
  • Color – allows you to use drop-down menus to select the buttons color for Normal and Pressed.
  • Transparency – enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the button.

- Send Command After Holding – Sets the required time for holding the button to apply the action for which the button is configured.

  • Position and Size – X and Y position the button at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the button box.
  • Set Sync Condition – Automatically synchronizes the button to the selected variable. To create a variable, see Variables, page 214. This option is only available for toggle buttons.

Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions

Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions

After you have added a button, slider bar, or a dial kit on your Viewer, define the actions it initiates using the Button/Slider Bar Actions panel. To access the panel, click on a button, slider bar, or dial key in the Viewer. The Button/Slider Bar Action panel appears.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) ControlAssist(LAN) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Function Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) Commands Link To: PowerPoint

The Button/Slider Bar Actions panel consists of the following elements:

Setting Description
Device Lists the added devices and the advanced functions.
Room Select the room that contains the devices the Viewer will control. Use this drop-down menu to select rooms in the KNX system and display KNX devices. The Viewer will only upload to a controller configured with the same Room name (see Left Sidebar, page 102). Select All Rooms to allow the Viewer to control all rooms. Selecting All Rooms will upload the Viewer to all controllers.The Accessible Room defines what Devices are available to configure new Actions in Button/Slider Bar Properties (see page 158). Only Devices listed under the same Room (see page 102) as the Viewer's Accessible Room will be listed for use in Button/Slider Bar Properties.
Function Lists the supported functions for your chosen device or advanced option. Double-click a function to add it to the Command List, which shows a sequence of tasks to be executed when specified conditions are met for the button, slider bar, or dial key. For details on functions, see Functions, page 161.
Commands Lists thecommands that initiate when the button or dial key is pressed. Device and Advanced Option functions can be added and associated in the Commands list together. Commands initiate in the order that they are added to the list. Right-click in the Commands list to use the menu selections: Move Up, Move Down, Copy, Paste, Delete, Save as Macro, or Test Tool.
Toggle ON / Toggle OFF or Press / ReleaseWhen the Button Mode (page 138) is set to Toggle or Press and Release, the Commands list splits to set the two c commands: Toggle ON / Press – lists the commands that initiate when the button is first pressed or pressed and held. Toggle OFF / Release – lists the commands that initiate when the button is pressed a second time (Toggle), or released (Press and Release). When the button is pressed again, Toggle ON initiates and the cycle repeats.
ATEN VK112EU - Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions - 2The Level drop-down menu appears when an Advanced Slider Bar is selected on the Viewer page. The number of levels in the drop-down menu reflect the Level set in the Advanced Slider Bar's properties (page 144). Use the drop-down menu to select a level and then add a command for each of the Advanced Slider Bar's levels (see page 164 for details).
ATEN VK112EU - Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions - 3Use Move up to move an action up in the Commands list, or Move down to move an action down in the Commands list.
ATEN VK112EU - Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions - 4Use Delete to remove an action from the Commands list.
[BHCY]Use Save as Macro to save the commands in the Commands list as a macro.
ATEN VK112EU - Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions - 5Use Test Tool to connect to a controller and test the action(s) in the Commands list.

You can configure a button with Device commands (On, Off, Stop, Play, etc.); as a Macro to send multiple commands to one or more devices; or as a Link to other Viewer pages. Advanced Options allow you to add conditions to the commands, as described on the next page.

Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions

To add one or more actions to a button, slider bar, or dial key, follow the steps below.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 ControlAssist(LAN) vm(LAN) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(HEX) HTTP HTTPS If Variable1 = Variable1 If Variable1 - Variable1

  1. In the project file, click to select the button, slider bar, or dial key in the Viewer. The Button/Slider Bar Action panel appears.
  2. In the Button/Slider Bar Action panel, select a Room.
  3. Add commands.

For details on device functions and advanced functions, see Functions, page 161.

a) Click a device or an advanced option to display its supported functions.
b) Double-click a function to add it to the Commands list.
c) Repeat step 3a and 3b if you wish to initiate a sequence of actions.

  1. In the Commands list, double-click the commands to configure them.

Functions

Button/slider bar functions can be understood as device functions and advanced functions.

- Device functions – These are functions that the selected controller or a device managed by the controller initiates. The supported device functions vary depending on the device you select in the Device list, as illustrated below. For details on controller functions, see Device Functions, page 163. Controller functions

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM3404H(Serial) VS461(IR) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(HEX) HTTP HTTPS

VM3404H functions
Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM3404-I(Serial) VS461(IR) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition 2 Function All Output Port display native resolution for sca Echo off Echo on Implement ATEN default EDID setting Implement customized EDID mode Implement port 1 connected display's EDID Manually implement the best resolution for all c OSD off OSD on Output Port* display native resolution for scalir Read device information Reset Scaling Output Port * to 1024x768@60

- Advanced functions – These are functions that involve more than one devices in the project. Use the indicated column to select an advanced function, the available options are listed in the Function list. For details about each advanced function, see Advanced Functions, page 166.

Slider Bar Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function VK2100-ID01 VM3404H(Serial) VS461(IR) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name New Macro New Macro (1)

Device Functions

◆ Each ATEN controller supports the following functions.

- Delay – adds a delay in seconds. Enter a number between 0.1-180. - Relay – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Relay port.

- DO – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Digital Output port.

- Wake on LAN – powers on the specified computer (MAC address) over Ethernet.

- Serial Raw (ASCII) – adds a serial command in the ASCII mode.

- Serial Raw (HEX) – adds a serial command in the HEX mode.

- Telnet Raw (ASCII) – adds a telnet command in the ASCII mode.

- TCP Raw (ASCII) – adds a TCP command in the ASCII mode.

- TCP Raw (HEX) – adds a TCP command in the HEX mode.

♦ UDP Raw (ASCII) – adds a UDP command in the ASCII mode.

♦ UDP Raw (HEX) – adds a UDP command in the HEX mode.

- HTTP – adds an HTTP command.

- HTTPS – adds an HTTPS command.

- Pronto Hex Code – adds an IR command using Pronto Hex codes.

- Value Types

When a device command has multiple values you can double-click it and use the Show Flag Menu* to select a device setting:

Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Library Value Flag Value Variables

- Library Value – use the drop-down menu to select a device setting for the command. The selection of settings in the drop-down menu can be modified using the Database Generator to edit the command string (see Editing / Adding a New Device, page 248).

Flag2 Flag Variable – clicking this button allows a Flag with a set of values to be selected for the action. The button’s action will select a setting according to the Flag value. Each value in a Flag can be set to a different device using a Set Flag (as a button to select

the device). When that (Set Flag) button is pressed, the Flag value is set for that particular device, and will be used as the setting for this action, when it's button is pressed.

Volume Variables – Select this option to use a Variable in the command. After selecting the option, a drop-down menu containing a list of the Variables that you created appear.
Slider Value Slider Value – select this option to configure a Basic Slider Bar's command. The range and change levels are automatically configured according to the minimum and maximum values set for the Basic Slider Bar. This option only appears when a Basic Slider Bar is selected on the Viewer page and you are adding Slider Bar Action commands.

Note: The Show Flag Menu allows you to use a single Flag for all devices rather than adding a Conditional Flag for each device.

- Dial Value Dial Value – select this option to use the string of values that has been dialed using the dial kit via Viewer from a mobile device.

Level 1 Level – When an Advanced Slider Bar is selected on a Viewer page, the Level drop-down menu appears above the Commands list. A command must be added to each level of an Advanced Slider Bar. To configure each level, use the drop-down menu to select a level and then add a command to it.

2 Function Set ID* Source HDMI2 Set ID* Source S-Vide Set ID* Source SDI Set ID* Source VGA Set ID* Source YPbPr Set ID* Volume * Get ID* Ambient Get ID* Audio Source 3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (6) IL420 Set ID0001 Volume 000004 Level 4 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 9 Level 10

Applications of Device Functions

Example: Configuring actions of dial keys.

Out of the 15 keys on a dial kit, only the Call and End Call keys require configuration, the actions for other keys are pre-configured to send out the number or character as indicated on the keys.

Display Screen Dial Keys

Follow the steps below to add an action to the Call key.

  1. Click the Call key in the Viewer to display the Button Action panel.
  2. Select a device (e.g. a video conferencing system) and double-click to add a function for the key. In this case, it should be a dialing function.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 CCS1000D(LAN) RAV 900(LAN) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition 2 Function Dail (Type*)(ID*)(number*) Dail Fill In(Type*)(ID*)(number*) Gain(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*)(Group*)(Value*) HOOK(Type*)(ID*)(ON/OFF*) Marco(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*)(*name*) Mute(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*)(Group*)(Mode*) Preset(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*) Redail(Type*)(ID*) Telnet Raw(ASCII) 3 Commands (Telnet) on VK2100-ID01 Ethernet (2) RAV 900 D

  1. Double-click the added command and select Dial Value.

Commands type 880 )(ID A )(number Dial Value ) Library Value Flag Value Variables Dial Value

Advanced Functions

Use advanced options for button和社会 actions that involve a series of actions (Macro), actions that the involve page redirect (Link), or actions that involve change or update of device settings of multiple objects (Set Variable).

Note: Associate Set Flag, Condition, Change Button State, or Change Label commands with device commands in the Commands list by dragging and dropping them into a tree view list, which allows them to initiate together (see Applications of Advanced Functions, page 168).

  • Macro – sends multiple commands to one or more devices. Select to add a macro command from the Function list. To create a macro, add multiple device actions to the Commands list, then click the Save as Macro icon or access the function by clicking the Library icon (page 90).
  • Link – a command used on a button to:

  • redirect a Viewer Page to another Page when the button is pressed, for example, a Home page button, which redirects the display to the home page.

  • redirect one or more Viewers to a specified Page when the button is pressed. For example, when an Exit button is pressed, you can have all Viewers (used by touch panels and/or mobile devices in one meeting room) return to their home page.
    ◆ Configure the following fields for the command:

3 Commands - Link To Home Page Mirror in Viewer1 Myself Mirror

  • Link To: Select a destination page
  • Myself/Mirror: Select Myself to have the Viewer link to a selected page only on the tapped device; select Mirror to have all the devices that use the same Viewer file to return to the selected page.

For more information on configuring a button, see Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions, page 160.

- Set Variable – creates a variable to represent a device setting (e.g. speaker volume) that can be used by two or more control objects (e.g. slider bar or buttons) in the Viewer. This function is used when you have more than one Viewer objects controlling the same device.

Note: To complete this setting, go to Properties of the control objects and configure the Set Sync Conditions setting.

  • Set Flag – sets a flag value to represent the new device status when a command changes a device setting. Set Flags are added to the Commands list after device commands to change the Flag (device status).
  • Condition – adds one or more conditions that must be met for commands to initiate. The conditions can be based on a Variable or a feedback value (setting value sent from a managed device).
  • Variable conditions— Use Variable conditions for the controller to carry out actions (commands) when the specified Variable meets the specified conditions. Use Variable If, Variable Else If, and/or Variable Else to fully cover all scenarios in your application. For example, if you want a display a warning message on the Viewer when the volume of a speaker is at its maximum (10 dB), you will need to: (a) Set up a Variable for the speaker volume; (b) Select a Variable If condition; (c) Double-click the condition to set the Variable value to 10; (d) Drag a Change Label command and nest it under the condition you selected in step (a); (e) Double-click the Change Label command to type the warning message you wish to display when the speaker volume reaches 10 db.

- Feedback conditions – Use feedback conditions for the controller to carry out actions (commands) when the specified feedback value meets the specified conditions. Use Feedback If, Feedback Else If, and/or Feedback Else to fully cover all scenarios in your application.

Note: The Else If and Else conditions can only be nested under the If conditions and can not be used on their own.

  • Change Button State – this command changes the image of another button when this button is pressed – allowing the image of any other button to change when the command from this button is sent. Change Button State is added to the end of the Commands lists. When adding this to a Toggle button it allows the image to switch with the toggle behavior: Normal or Pressed. In this situation the Change Button State is added to the end of both the Toggle ON and Toggle OFF Commands lists.
  • Change Label – this option changes a label’s text with text that you enter manually or with text from a device’s return message. A Manual Change Label can be added to the beginning or end and with a Condition in the Commands list. Adding it to a Condition guarantees the label only changes when the command initiates.
  • Change Group Button State – this option adds a command that changes the button selected in a Radio Group (page 95). Create a Radio Group

and then a Function will be listed for it when Change Group Button State is selected. Add the Change Group Button State to the Commands list of a button and use the drop-down menu to select the button in the Radio Group you want selected.

- Change Slider Bar Level – this option adds a command that changes the level of a Slider Bar. Create a Slider Bar and then a Function will be listed for it when Change Slider Bar Level is selected. Add the Change Slider Bar Level to the Commands list of a button and use the drop-down menus to select the Slider Bar and Level to change.

- Change Button Name – this option adds a command that displays specified text on another button when this button is tapped. A typical application of this command is when you want to show the assigned source on an output device as soon as the source is switched.

- Function – lists the commands that can be added to the Commands list. Select an option under Device, then double-click or drag & drop commands from the Function list to add them to the Commands list.

Applications of Advanced Functions

Advanced Options allow you to include conditions with commands in the Commands list. Associate Set Flag, Condition, Change Button State or Change Label functions with a command in the Commands list by dragging and dropping them into a tree view listed with the command, so that they initiate in the order listed.

Set Flag

Adds a Set Flag to change a Flag's value when a command changes a device setting. This sets the Flag value to match the new device setting (e.g. ON or OFF). Always add a Set Flag to a Condition Flag, after the device action(s):

If Flag1 equal to OFF (RS232 Device) VM0808H-1 Power on detection Set Flag Flag1 to ON

To add a Set Flag:

  1. Under Device, select Set Flag.

  2. From the Function list, select the Flag.

  3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Flag to add it to the end of the Condition Flag, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 2 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Link Set Flag Condition Flag1 Flag2 Flag3 Flag4 Flag5 If Flag2 equal to OFF (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection Set Flag Flag2 to ON

  1. Double-click Set Flag in the Commands list to use the drop-down menus to set the Flag and Value.

- Set Flag2 to ON

Condition

Adds a condition that must be met before the commands listed with it can initiate. When the button is pressed, the Condition's set value must equal the Flag or Feedback value for the command(s) to initiate. There are two condition types: Flag and Feedback.

- Flag – Adds a condition based on a Flag’s value. “If Flag equals Value” is true, the condition is met and the commands listed with the Condition will initiate. Always add a Condition Flag at the top of the Commands list, drag and drop the device command(s) and then a Set Flag at the end, in a tree view list:

If Flag1 equal to OFF (RS232 Device) VM0808H-1 Power on detection Set Flag Flag1 to ON

To add a Condition Flag:

  1. Under Device, click Condition.
  2. From the Function list, select Flag.

  3. Double-click Flag to add the Condition Flag to the Commands list.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag 1 Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function 2 Commands Flag Feedback if Flag1 equal to OFF 3

  1. Double-click the Condition Flag in the Commands list to use the dropdown menus to set the Flag and Value.

- If Flag1 equal to OFF

  1. From the Function list, drag & drop device commands to add them to the Condition Flag, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Implement ATEN default EDI Implement port 1 connected d Manually implement the best t Mute all Output Port Mute Output Port * Power off detection Power on detection Reset 3 Commands IfFlag1 equal to OFF (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port(1)

  1. Add a Set Flag after the last device command in the Commands list:

If Flag1 equal to OFF (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Powe Set Flag Flag1 to ON

- Feedback – adds a condition based on the text from a serial/telnet/TCP device's return message. Always add a Condition Feedback to a serial/

telnet/TCP command, with command(s) added below the Condition Feedback, in a tree view list:

Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Data: wait 300 ms If Feedback equal to (ASCII) POD OK (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection

Receive Time – when a Feedback condition is added to a device command the wait to Receive Time drop-down menu appears allowing you to set the amount of time to wait before it stops receiving the return message from the device.

There are three Condition Feedback types:

  • Equal – when the text sent from a serial/telnet/TCP device’s return message matches all of the text entered for a Condition Feedback Equals, the commands listed below it will initiate.
  • Include – when the text sent from a serial/telnet/TCP device’s return message matches part of the text entered for a Condition Feedback Include, the commands listed below it will initiate.
  • Bypass – this option bypasses matching text from the serial/telnet/TCP return message and initiates a Change Label command. The label’s text will change to the return message sent from the device (i.e. the Feedback Result). A Change Label must be added to the Feedback Bypass for it to work.

To add a Condition Feedback Equal/Include:

  1. Under Device, click Condition.
  2. From the Function list, select Feedback.

  3. From the Function list, drag and drop Feedback to add it to the Serial/Telnet/TCP command, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Flag 2 Feedback 3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Sea If Feedback equal to (ASCII) 3

  1. Double-click If Feedback equals to in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select equal to or include and enter the Text.

- Feedback equal to ASCII

Text entered here must match all (equal to) or part (include) of the text from a serial/telnet/TCP device's return message for the command(s) to initiate. Use the ASCII / HEX drop-down menu to select the format.

  1. From the Function list, drag & drop device command(s) to add them to the Feedback Equal/Include Condition, in a tree view list:

Function Implement ATEN default EDI Implement port 1 connected d Manually implement the best Mute all Output Port Mute Output Port * Power off detection Power on detection Commands Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Data: check pod wait 3 If Feedback equal to (ASCII) pod off (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection

To add a Feedback Bypass Condition with Change Label:

  1. Under Device, click Condition.
  2. Select Feedback from the Function list.

  3. From the Function list, drag and drop Feedback to add it to the Serial/Telnet/TCP command, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag 1 Condition 2 Function 3 Commands Flag 2 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Scala Feedback If Feedback equal to (ASCII) 3

  1. Double-click If Feedback equals to in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select bypass.

- Feedback bypass ASCII

  1. Under Device, select Change Label.

  2. From the Function list, select the Viewer Page where the label is located.

  3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Viewer Page to add it to the Feedback Bypass Condition, in a tree view list:

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Senal) VM5808H(Senal) Condition Change Button State Change Label Function Home Page Light 6 Video wall Signage Hybrid Sound Projector Commands Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H If Feedback bypass (ASCII) Change Label Video Wall_2744 to "FEED" 7

  1. Double-click Change Label in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select a label. Labels are identified by object IDs (see page 136).

- Change Label Video wall - Video Wall_274 to FEEDBACK_RESULT

The label's text will change to the serial/telnet/TCP device's return message.

Change Button State

This option is used to change another buttons image when this button is pressed – allowing the button image to switch depending on the status: Normal or Pressed. Change Button State is added to the end of the Commands lists and should point to a Toggle button. Adding this to a Toggle button allows the image to switch with the toggle behavior: Normal or Pressed.

To add a Change Button State:

Properties Mode Toggle Appearance Dialog Message Name Font Times New Roman 48 pt B I U Style Image Normal Pressed 0

  1. Under Properties, use the Mode drop-down menu to select a button type.

  2. Under Style, click the Normal and Pressed button to select an image/color* for the button's state.

Note: Use the Style drop-down menu to select Image to import an image file for the button state, or Color to choose a color format for the button state.

  1. Add the Toggle ON and Toggle OFF device commands to the Commands lists.

  2. Under Device, select Change Button State.

  3. In the Function list, select the Viewer page.

  4. Select the Toggle ON radio button, then in the Function list, double-click the Viewer page to add it to the end of the Toggle ON commands in the Commands list.
  5. Select the Toggle OFF radio button, then in the Function list, double-click the Viewer page to add it to the end of the Toggle OFF commands in the Commands list.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Condition 4 Change Button State Change Label 2 Function 5 Home Page (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection Change Button _2814 to Normal on Page Home Page Toggle OFF 7 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power off detection - Change Button State Home Page - 2814 to

  1. In each Commands list, double-click the Change Button State command to set the Button and State (Normal or Pressed).

Change Button State Home Page 2814 to Pressed

Change Label

Changes a label's text with text that you enter manually or with text from a serial/telnet/TCP device's return message (Feedback Result). A Change Label that uses a return message, must be added to a Feedback Bypass Condition (page 173). A Manual Change Label can be added anywhere in the Commands list. Adding it to a Condition guarantees the label changes only when the command initiates.

If Flag equal to OFF (RS232 Device) VM0808H-1 Power on detection Set Flag Flag to ON Change Label VM0808H-1 - Zone 1 Video_8197 to POD ON

To add a Manual Change Label:

  1. Under Device, click Change Label.
  2. In the Function list, select the Viewer page where the label is located.
  3. Double-click or drag and drop the Viewer page to add the Change Label to the Commands list.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function Home Page Light Video wall Signage Hybrid Sound Projector 3 Commands 3 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Pow Change Label 2_22 to "" on Page Sound Condition Change Button State Change Label

  1. Add a Change Label to multiple or Toggle ON / Toggle OFF Command lists to have the same label change text for different actions.

  2. In the Commands list, double-click Change Label to use the drop-down menu to select a Label and input the Text. This is the text in the label that will appear when the button is pushed.

- Change Label Sound - 2_2752 to

Repeat the steps to add a Change Label for the reverse action (i.g., On and Off).

Change Group Button State

Adds a command that changes the selection in a Radio Group (see page 95). To use this function, first create a Radio Group and then add a button to the Viewer page. Add a Change Group Button State independently or with a device command:

To add a Change Group Button State:

  1. Under Device, select Change Group Button State.
  2. From the Function list, select the Viewer Page where the Radio Group is located.
  3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Viewer Page to add it to the Commands list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VM0808H(Serial) VM0808(IR) TCPIP(LAN) TELNETT1(LAN) Change Label 1 Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level 2 Function Video wall Hybrid Camera Projector 3 Commands Change Group Button _72 to Checka

  1. Double-click Change Group Button in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select the Button.

Change Group Button Projector _72 _72 _73 _74 _75 _76

Change Slider Bar Level

Adds a command that changes the level of a Slider Bar. To use this function, first create a Slider Bar on a Viewer page. Add a Change Slider Bar Level independently or with a device command.

To add a Change Slider Bar Level:

  1. Under Device, select Change Slider Bar Level.
  2. From the Function list, select the Viewer Page where the Slider Bar is located.
  3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Viewer Page to add it to the Commands list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VM0808H(Serial) VM0808(IR) TCPIP(LAN) TELNET1(LAN) Change Label Change Group Button State 1 Change Slider Bar Level 2 Function Signage Hybrid Blind Sound 3 Commands Change Slider Bar_4 to Level 1 on Page 2 3

  1. Double-click Change Slider Bar in the Commands list and use the dropdown menus to select the Slider Bar and Level.

Change Slider Bar Sound _4 to Level 1

Change Button Name

The Change Button Name command is used to display specified text on a selected button when the configured button is tapped. An application of this command is indicating the assigned source for a display device on a Viewer as soon as the source is assigned. This way, you can keep track of the source that is currently showing on a particular display device.

Example:

  • Indicate the currently assigned source on a display device (in the Viewer).
  • Assume an environment consisting of one monitor and five sources buttons (computer, laptop, camera...etc.), as illustrated below, and that when a source button is tapped, the source will be immediately assigned to the display.

Configuration goal: To have the assigned source printing on the display button (on the Viewer page), configure each source button so that when it is tapped, the following actions (commands) initiate: (1) Display the source to the display; (2) Print the name of the assigned source onto the display device.

View1 Video Wall 1 Display* Signage Hybrid Video Wall 2 Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name Function Home Page Light Video Wall Signage Hybrid Blind Camera Audio Projector 4 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Change Button Name _26 to "PC" on Page Video Wall 5

  1. Click a source button to display the Button Action panel.
  2. In the Button Action panel, select Change Button Name.
  3. From the Function list, double-click the Viewer page where the source button is located. In this example, double-click the Video Wall option. The Change Button Name command is added.
  4. From the Commands list, double-click the Change Button Name command and configure the following.

- Select the ID of the display button to indicate the location of print the text. In this example, it is the video wall's ID.

- Type the text you wish to show when the source button is tapped. In this example, enter “PC”.

  1. Follow steps 1 to 4 to configure each of the source buttons.

Library

The Library icon on the Project bar offers the following functions. The table below provides an overview of each function.

Button Minimalist

Control Description
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 2GraphicΩlibraryFind graphic templates such as backgrounds, buttons, device icons, and control interfaces for your viewer. For details, see Graphic Library, page 183.
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 3Flag Flags are created to include parameters when settings are changed to indicate the current status. For details, see Flag, page 186.
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 4Monitor Monitors allow you to set Conditions for Digital Input (dry contact) and Digital Input (VDC) signals and Flags on a port that will initiate an Action. In addition, you can create Listen to port and Query port monitors which check a device's status to initiate actions. For details, see Monitor, page 188.
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 5Macro Macros initiate a sequence of actions on one or more hardware devices. For details, see Macro, page 210.
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 6Schedule Click to create scheduled events. For details, see Scheduled Events, page 212.
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 7Variables Creates a Variable for a device setting (e.g. volume) that is controlled by two or more objects (e.g. slider bar or buttons) on the Viewer. When the device setting is changed through one of the objects, its setting is automatically synced and reflected on all the objects. For details, see Variables, page 214.
ATEN VK112EU - Library - 8Timer A timer event is a device action that initiates as soon as the defined countdown time is up. The advantage of using a timer event, as opposed to a combination of delay command and device command, is that it saves time by executing the defined action while other actions (commands) within the series execute. For more details, see Timers, page 223.

ATEN VK112EU - Library - 9

Graphic Library

The Library icon on the Project bar provides a Graphics tab and dropdown menus with ready-to-use graphics for backgrounds, buttons, icons and device interfaces. Device Interface provides entire page layouts that you can use as templates for different types of devices. Double-click or drag and drop graphics to add them to the page. Images can be imported for icons and buttons in various formats (*.png,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.bmp).

Button

Button Minimalist

Background

Background Minimalist

Image (Device Icon)

Image Minimalist

Device Interface

Device Interface Minimalist Audio Processor Video Conference Audio Conference Video Matrix TV Switch

ATEN VK112EU - Device Interface - 2

Flag

Flags are created for control buttons to include parameters for when settings are changed or requests are made to change settings on a device. Flags indicate what the status is and what action to take according to the value. Flags are added as actions to Button Properties as a Condition or Set Flag value.

Conditions tell a button to initiate associated actions if the flag value is true: "If Flag equals Value" initiate the action. Actions are associated with a condition so that they only initiate if the flag value is correct. That way an ON command is only sent to a device if the current flag value is OFF.

Set Flag changes the flag value when a device setting has changed. So that if a device is OFF and the action turns the device ON, adding a “Set Flag 1 to ON” will change the flag value to ON. Now the flag’s value matches the device status so that actions associated with flag Conditions will initiate accordingly.

Create flags for a device and add them as a Condition and Set Flag value in the Action – Button Properties (see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158).

To create a Flag:

  1. Select Flag and click . The New Flag menu appears.

New Flag Name ON/OFF Default Value OFF 0 - 10 ASCII OK Cancel

  1. Enter a Name and select a radio button to set the flag value.

  2. Select On/Off and use the drop-down menu to select the Default Value.

  3. Enter a range (1-100) for the values in the two boxes and use the drop-down menu to select the Default Value. Use the drop-down menu to select the format ASCII or HEX.

  4. Click to create more flags or double-click a flag to edit it. The flags will appear in the list, as shown below.

Create New Name Value Default Flag1 OFF, ON OFF Flag2 0 - 10 (ASCII) 0 Flag3 32 - 4B (HEX) 32 Flag4 0 - 10 (ASCII) 5

  • Name – Lists the Flag names which have been created.
  • Value – Lists the flag's values or range of values.
  • Default – Lists the flag's default value.
  • X – Deletes a flag from the list.

  • Select Condition or Set Flag to add flags as a command in Button Action by selecting a button on a Viewer page (see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158).

ATEN VK112EU - Flag - 3

Monitor

Understanding Monitor

A Monitor allows you to set conditions on a port using Digital Input (VDC) and Digital Input (Dry Contact) signals, return messages, and Flags. When the condition is met, the controller will initiate the desired action. Digital Input (VDC) hardware devices provide voltage signals between 1 and 24. Digital Input (Dry Contact) hardware devices provide open and closed circuit signals. Hardware devices with return messages can be monitored using Listen to port or Query port conditions via text they transmit. These signals provide indicators from sensors or switches of an event. An event can be the temperature, power, dry contact, sensor, switch status, or message from a device. There are two parts to a monitor, the Condition and Action.

Monitor Page Options

There different types of monitors you can create to fulfill different scenarios. A monitor (as illustrated below) contain the following configuration fields:

Monitor If New Monitor 0.1 sec Type Name Query Frequency Condition Satisfy All Conditions 1 Device VK0200-ID03 2 Status 3 Condition Listen to port Query port Flag ID Input Variable VK0200-ID03(Serial Port 1) VK0200-ID03(Serial Port 2) VK0200-ID03(TCP Server) Action 1 Device Room-3 2 Function 3 Commands VK0200-ID03 Macro Timer Set Variable Delay Relay Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

Control Description
Type Use this drop-down list to select a monitor type:If – select this option for a single condition monitor. “If” the single condition is met, the action initiates. For details, see Creating an If Monitor, page 194.Switch– select this option for multiple conditions that use more than one “If” conditions for the monitor. In this type, if one of the conditions is met, the monitor will initiate the action. For details, see Creating a Switch Monitor, page 197.Bypass– select this option to transmit device feedback message to the selected variable actively listening for a message or by receiving a return message from the specified devices. For details, see Creating a Bypass Monitor, page 201.While Loop– select this option to execute the specified actions at the defined frequency (Query Frequency). For details, see Creating a While Loop Monitor, page 203.Professional– select this option to create variables and load values into these variables using programming script. For details, see Creating a Professional Monitor, page 204.
Name Enter a namefor the monitor.
Query FrequencyUse this drop-down menu to select how frequently the monitor checks a device for a signal.
Condition Use thissection to add one or more conditions that will need to be met for the Action to initiate. You can create up to 32 conditions for each monitor. For details, see Condition Types, page 190.
Action Use this sectionto create the commands that will initiate when the monitor’s conditions are met. For details, see Device Functions, page 163 and Advanced Functions, page 166.
ATEN VK112EU - Monitor Page Options - 2Click to hide or display the Device and Status/Function columns in the Condition and Action lists so that you can see a complete row of Conditions/Commands.
ATEN VK112EU - Monitor Page Options - 3Click to move an selected command up or down in the Commands list.
ATEN VK112EU - Monitor Page Options - 4Click to remove an selected command from the Commands list.

Condition Types

Note that you can create up to 32 conditions for each monitor.

- Listen to port / Query port

- (Query port only) Click F(x) to open the drop-down menu to select a device command to send out; or enter a command string; and then the click Edit Return Message icon and do as explained below.

Query Port (3) VM5808H F(x) - ASCII VK2100-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 1024x768@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1080p@50 Scaling Output Port * to 1080p@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1280x1024@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1280x800@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1400x1050@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1600x1200@60

- Edit Return Message

(Listen to port / Query port) Next configure the parameters for the return message from the device. This message must match for the condition to be met. In the Condition list double-click the command and then click to open the Edit Return Message window:

Edit Return Message VK2100-ID01 Listen to Port (1) VM0404H Return Message Select character(s) within the return message Select string with fixed length String Apply Equal to OK Cancel

Use the drop-down menu and enter a string of that will represent the characters in a return message from the serial device:

- Select string with fixed length

Reset S t r i n g o f C h a r a c t e r s

Use this to set a string of characters that are set within a fixed parameter. Enter a string of characters and use the S to set the start of the string and E to set the end and then click Apply. The return message will need to fit the fixed string of characters set in the text box next to the Drop-Down Menu (see next page) for the monitor to be triggered.

- Select string with a non-fixed length

Reset S E S t r i n g o f C h a r a c t e r s

Use this to set a string of characters where the parameters are variable. Enter a string of characters and use the S to set the start of the string and E to set the end and then click Apply. The return message will need to fit the fixed string of characters set in the text box next to the Drop-Down Menu (see below) for the monitor to be triggered.

Equal to Equal to Not equal to Include Exclude

Above, enter characters that the Select string with fixed length or Select string with non-fixed length string must match and how they must be matched: Equal to, Not equal to, Include, or Exclude for the condition to be triggered.

♦ Flag

Creates a flag condition for the monitor. Use the drop-down menus to set a format (how the flag value must be matched) and the flag value for the condition to be triggered.

Flag Flag3 = 32

- I/O Input

Create a trigger signal from a device according to the voltage. Only device with a Digital Input (dry contract) or Digital Input (VDC) port appear in the Status list. Double-click a device in the Status list to add it to the

Condition list. Double-click the command in the Condition list to configure the setting:

ATEN VK112EU - - I/O Input - 1

IO Input

ATEN VK112EU - - I/O Input - 2

on VDC Port (2) VK2100-ID01

The High or Low status tells the Monitor to initiate an Action when the device signal is above or below the threshold setting* for the port:

Digital Input (VDC)

  • High - states that when the voltage signal is above the Upper Threshold to initiate the Action.
  • Low - states that when the voltage signal is below the Lower Threshold to initiate the Action.

Digital Input (Dry Contact)

According to an open or closed circuit status for the port:

  • Open - states that when the circuit is Open to initiate the Action.
    ◆ Closed - states that when the circuit is Closed to initiate the Action.

Functions

  • Delay – adds a delay in seconds. Enter a number between 0.1-180.
  • Relay – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Relay port.
  • DO – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Digital Output port.
  • Wake on LAN – powers on the specified computer (MAC address) over Ethernet.
  • Serial Raw (ASCII) – adds a serial command in the ASCII mode.
  • Serial Raw (HEX) – adds a serial command in the HEX mode.
  • Telnet Raw (ASCII) – adds a telnet command in the ASCII mode.
  • TCP Raw (ASCII) – adds a TCP command in the ASCII mode.
  • TCP Raw (HEX) – adds a TCP command in the HEX mode.
    ♦ UDP Raw (ASCII) – adds a UDP command in the ASCII mode.
  • UDP Raw (HEX) – adds a UDP command in the HEX mode.
  • HTTP – adds an HTTP command.
  • HTTPS – adds an HTTPS command.
  • TCP Feedback Raw (ASCII) – adds a feedback in ASCII format to having received a monitored input from a TCP client device.
  • TCP Feedback Raw (HEX) – adds a feedback in HEX format to having received a monitored input from a TCP client device.

Creating an If Monitor

To create a monitor for a device port with a Condition that initiates an Action, do the following.

  1. In the Design tab, click Library and click Monitor .

  2. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

ATEN VK112EU - Creating an If Monitor - 2

  1. Click
  2. Select If from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.
  3. Use the drop-down menu to set the Query Frequency.
  4. Select All Conditions or Any Conditions.

Monitor If New Monitor 0.1 sec Type Name Query Frequency Condition Satisfy All Conditions 1 Device VK2100-ID01 2 Status 3 Condition Listen to port Query port Flag IO Input Variable VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 1) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 2) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 3) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 4) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 5) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 6) KE6900(LAN) VK2100-ID01(TCP Server) Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 KE6900(LAN) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII)

These options are only for advanced setups that require multiple events from hardware devices connected to multiple conditions. Most devices only require one signal Status added to the Condition List to initiate an Action. Most installations will not need to use this option, therefore it can be ignored.

  • All Conditions: Add multiple conditions – all of which must be met for the Action to initiate.
  • Any Conditions: Add multiple conditions – one of which must be met for the Action to initiate.

  • Under Device, select a Controller from the drop-down menu, and then choose one of the following monitor types. For details, see Condition Types, page 190.

  • Listen to port – to create a monitor that actively listens for a message from the device. Under Status, double-click a device port to add it to the Condition list.

  • Query port – to create a monitor that sends out a command to the device until a feedback message is received from the device.
  • Flag – to create a flag condition for the monitor.
  • I/O Input – to create a trigger signal from a device according to the voltage.

  • Under Status, double-click to add a device port or flag to the Condition list. Then double-click the device port or flag in the Condition list to configure the condition settings.

Note: To set the controller as a TCP server, use the TCP Server option in the Status column, and make sure to type a TCP server port in the controller's properties settings (page 108).

  1. (Optional) Use the Operator option to add additional High or Low conditions (see step 4, page 195).

  2. Go to the Action section at the bottom of the page to select the hardware Device and add the Function to the Commands list, as explain in the steps that follow.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State 2 Function Delay Relay DD Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) 3 Commands

Note: For more information about Functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158.

a) First select the hardware under Devices.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Delay Relay DD Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

b) Under Function, double-click a command to add it to the Commands list. This Command initiates when the Condition is met. For details on Functions and Commands, see Device Functions, page 163 and Advanced Functions, page 166.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2. Function 3. Commands VK2100-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 100 VK224-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 100 VM0404H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 100 VM5808H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 120 Macro Scaling Output Port * to 120 Set Flag Scaling Output Port * to 140 Condition Scaling Output Port * to 160 Change Button State Scaling Output Port * to 160 Scaling Output Port * to 190 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Scaling Output Port 01 to 1400x1050

Note: If you have configured the controller as a TCP server, add TCP Feedback Raw (ASCII) or TCP Feedback Raw (HEX) command to provide feedback to the TCP client.

Creating a Switch Monitor

  1. In the Design tab, click Library

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a Switch Monitor - 1

  1. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

  1. Click

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a Switch Monitor - 3

  1. Select Switch from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.

  2. Use the drop-down menu to set the Query Frequency.

  3. Use the options to create multiple condition comparisons, as explained below.

Monitor Switch New Monitor 88 Type Name 100 ms Query Frequency VK2100-ID01 Query port VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 5) VK2100-ID01 Query Serial Port (5) Message Case 1 When�Message Equal to Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) 1(Serial) VM0808(IR) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

Control Description
Type Use the drop-down menu to select:If – select this option for a single condition comparison monitor.Switch – select this option for multi-condition comparisons that use multiple “If” comparisons for the command.
Name Enter a unique name for the monitor.
Query Frequency Use this drop-down menu to select how frequently the monitor checks a device for a signal. Options are: 100 ms - 1 second.
Drop-Down MenusUnder the Type drop-down menu are four addition drop-down menus used to configure the Switch Condition:Controller– use the first drop-down to menu select the controller for a Switch condition.Listen to port / Query port– use the second drop-down menu to select the condition type for a Switch condition (see step 4, page 195 for details).Serial Device PortUse the third drop-down menu to select a serial device port and configure Edit Return Message (to configure, see Edit Return Message, page 190).To set the controller as a TCP server, use the TCP Server option in the Status column, and make sure to type a TCP server port in the controller’s properties settings (page 108).Case– use the fourth drop-down menu to add cases by selecting Add More Cases for comparison that need to be met before monitor’s condition will initiate. In the left text box enter a name for the Case, in the right text box enter the character string that the return message should match.
ActionUse this section to create commands for the monitor. See Button /Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158, for details on configuring commands.
Click this icon to switch to the Action list view so that you can see a complete row of the command’s functions. This is a toggle button.
x Closes the Monitor window.
  1. Go to the Action section at the bottom of the page to select the hardware Device and add the Function to the Commands list, as explain in the steps that follow.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State 2 Function Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) 3 Commands

Note: For more information about Functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158.

  1. First select the hardware under Devices.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

  1. Under Function, double-click a command to add it to the Commands list. This is the Command that initiates when the Condition is met. For details on what each function does, see Device Functions, page 163 and Advanced Functions, page 166.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 10% VK224-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 10% VM0404H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 10% VM5808H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 12% Macro Scaling Output Port * to 12% Set Flag Scaling Output Port * to 14% Condition Scaling Output Port * to 16% Change Button State Scaling Output Port * to 16% Scaling Output Port * to 19% (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port(3) VM5808H Scaling Output Port 01 to 1400x1050t

Note: If you have configured the controller as a TCP server, add TCP Feedback Raw (ASCII) or TCP Feedback Raw (HEX) command to provide feedback to the TCP client.

  1. You can also add a Macro, Link, Set Flag or Monitor's Condition.
  2. After adding all the functions to the Commands list, the Switch monitor is complete.

Creating a Bypass Monitor

Follow the steps below to create a bypass monitor.

Monitor Bypass audioMonitor Type Name 0.1 sec Query Frequency VK2100-IDC Listen to port 840T-1(Serial Port 3) VK2100-ID01 Listen to 840T-1 Port (3) Message Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 AUDIO 840T-1(Serial) minitor2(Serial) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Audio2 - Set AUDIO to Bypass Library Value Bypass Value

  1. In the Design tab, click Library

and click Monitor .

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a Bypass Monitor - 2

  1. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

  1. Click

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a Bypass Monitor - 4

  1. Select Bypass from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.

  2. Configure the following settings.

  3. Query frequency: sets how frequently the monitor checks the device for a signal. Valid values range from 100 ms to 1 second.

  4. In the second drop-down list, select one of the following:

- Listen to port: actively listens for a message from the specified device.

- Query port: when a setting is changed on the specified device, the device sends a feedback message to the controller, informing the latest setting.

- In the last drop-down list, select the port or the device to be monitored.

  1. Configure the actions.

a) Select Set Variable.

b) Double-click the variable you wish to update when controller detects a change for the specified device setting.

c) For a variable, double-click the command and select Bypass.

3 Commands - Set AUDIO to Bypass

Creating a While Loop Monitor

Follow the steps below to create a while loop monitor.

Monitor While Loop ▼ Video Rotate Type Name 30.0 sec Query Frequency Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commends VK2100-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) VM5808H-1(LAN) ControlAssist(LAN) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name Scaling all Output Port to Scaling all Output Port to Scaling all Output Port to Scaling all Output Port to Setup 115200 baud rate Setup 19200 baud rate Setup 38400 baud rate Setup 9600 baud rate Setup High Fan speed Setup Low Fan speed Setup Standard Fan spe Show input * alert with hig Show input * alert with hig Switch Input Port * to Outp Switch Input Port * to all O Switch Output Port * to Ne Switch Output Port * to Pre Switch all Output Port to N Switch all Output Port to P Turn off Output Port * Turn off Output Port * CEC (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Delay 10.0 Sec on VK2100-ID01 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 02 to Output Port 01 Delay 10.0 Sec on VK2100-ID01 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 03 to Output Port 01 Delay 10.0 Sec on VK2100-ID01

  1. In the Design tab, click Library
    click Monitor .

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a While Loop Monitor - 2

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a While Loop Monitor - 3

  1. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

  1. Click

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a While Loop Monitor - 5

  1. Select While Loop from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.

  2. Use the Query Frequency drop-down menu to define the frequency at which the device checks for signals.

  3. From the Device list, select a device.

  4. (Optional) Select an advanced option. For details, see Advanced Functions, page 166.

  5. Double-click a function to added it to the Commands list. For details, see Device Functions, page 163 and Advanced Functions, page 166.

  6. Configure the added commands if required.

Creating a Professional Monitor

Example: Keep track of the assigned sources by indicating the input port number of the assigned source on each of the four screens on a Viewer page, as illustrated below.

Home Page Output 1 Output 2 01 01 Output 3 Output 4 01 01

For the controller to print the port number of the assigned source on each screen and keep this information up-to-date, the controller needs to:

  • constantly keep track of the assigned source
  • constantly print the port number on each screen icon

Follow the steps below to create a professional monitor.

Monitor Professional VMRead 0.1 sec Type Name Query Frequency Condition Trigger Mode and 1 Device VK2100-ID07 2 Status 3 Condition Listen to port VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 1) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 2) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 3) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 4) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 5) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 6) VM6404H(LAN) VK2100-ID07 Query Ethernet (1) VM6404H Action VMRead Edit 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID07 VM6404H(LAN) Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) Change Button Name 01_2 to InputNToOutput1 on Page Home Page (ASCII) Change Button Name 01_3 to "InputNToOutput2" on Page Home Page Change Button Name 01_4 to "InputNToOutput3" on Page Home Page Change Button Name 01_5 to "InputNToOutput4" on Page Home Page

  1. In the Design tab, click Library and click Monitor.

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a Professional Monitor - 3

  1. Click to create a new monitor.
  2. Configure the following settings.

◆ From the Type drop-down menu, select Professional.
- Name the monitor.
♦ Define the query frequency.

  1. Configure the condition settings.

In this example, the controller VK2100 is set to query the input and output ports of the Matrix Switch, VM6404H, that connects to the controller every 0.1 second.

  • Add the condition(s) that must be met for initiating actions. For details on conditions, see Condition Types, page 190.
  • Select a Trigger Mode for the added conditions.

- And: Only initiate the added actions (commands) if the values of all specified inputs change.

  • Or: Initiate the added actions (commands) if the value of any specified input changes.
  • Independent: Use this option when you have multiple sets of actions. The added actions (commands) initiate if the corresponding set of inputs change in value.
  • Always: Initiate the added actions (commands) at the specified frequency.

5. Configure the Action settings.

a) Click Edit to script the codes.

Note:

  • This editor follows Lua’s programming rules. ATEN suggests using Notepad++ to script the codes before adding them to the Editor.
  • For details on built-in commands, see Built-in Commands, page 207.
  • When scripting codes for I/O inputs, use lower case “l” to represent the close status (e.g. input_io == 'l'), and “h” to represent open status (e.g. input_io == 'h').

In this example, use Script Editor to:

♦ Convert data format.
- Create four variables representing the assigned input for each screen. In this example, InputNToOutput1, InputNToOutput2, InputNToOutput3, and InputNToOutput4 are created.
- Load the input number of the assigned source to the created variables.

Below is sample of the scripts used for this scenario:

function vk_parser(input)
    local vminput = vk_hex_toascii(input)
    -- local vminput = input
    if vminput == nil or vminput == "" then
    return
end

local map = 0
for vmout, vmin in string.gmatch(vminput, "o([0-9]*)i([0-9]*) video [^]* audio [^]*[^\n]** ) do
    map[vmout] = vmin
end

local vk_var_1_InputNToOutput1 = map["01"]
local vk_var_2_InputNToOutput2 = map["02"]
local vk_var_3_InputNToOutput3 = map["03"]
local vk_var_4_InputNToOutput4 = map["04"]

vk_doc commands_1_VMRead(vk_var_1_InputNToOutput1, vk_var_2_InputNToOutput2, vk_var_3_InputNToOutput3, vk_var_4_InputNToOutput4) end 

b) Add actions.

In this example, add four Change Button Name commands:

Change Button Name SyncVM Home Page - 01_2 to output InputNToOutput1 ASCII

For details, see Device Functions, page 163 and Advanced Functions, page 166.

Built-in Commands

Command Description
jsonobj Converts JSON strings to tables.
vk_ascii_to_hex Converts strings from ASCII to Hex.
vk_doc commands_ID_name Defines the commands to be executed, e.g., vk_doc commands_1_output. A the user should define his/her own commands and their corresponding IDs. As long as the ID does not change, the command name can change.The same ID cannot be used for two different commands. The same applies to command names.
vk_hex_to_ascii Converts strings from Hex to ASCII.
Command Description
vk_parser(input1, input2)◆ Use this command to indicate a start to a set of scripts.◆ The brackets should contain equal number of inputs that you added in the Professional Monitor setup.◆ If the Trigger Mode is set to independent, the script should contain only one input, but the number of parsers should match the number of inputs added to the Monitor, e.g. vk_parser_1(input), vk_parser_2(input).
vk_var_ID_name Create a variable.

Duplicating a Created Monitor

To duplicate a created monitor to another controller, right-click a monitor, mouse over Duplicate, and then select a target controller.

VK0200-ID03 Create New Import from DBG Name Audio Input Output New Monitor New Monitor (1) Duplicate VK2200-ID01 VK1200-ID02 VK0200-ID03

ATEN VK112EU - Duplicating a Created Monitor - 2

Macro

Macros allow you to create a button that will initiate a sequence of actions across the same or different hardware devices. This saves time by allowing multiple devices to initiate actions all at once from one button. For example, you can create a macro to start a video presentation by adding functions to: dim lights, power on source, power on display, lower screen and play source. You can also add time delays between actions in a macro. Each project can store up to 104 macros.

When you click opens:

ATEN VK112EU - Macro - 1

from the Library's Macro tab, the window

Macro New Macro Name Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Macro Timer Set Variable Set Flag Condition Link Link SubPage Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button St Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(HEX) HTTP HTTPS

To create a macro:

  1. Select Macro and click .

ATEN VK112EU - To create a macro: - 1

  1. Enter a Name and select a Viewer from the drop-down menu, then click OK.

  2. Go to the Actions section at the bottom of the page to select hardware under Device and add the Function to the Commands list:

Macro New Macro Name Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) 1(Serial) VM0808(IR) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) 3 Commands

Note: For more information about adding Functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 158.

  1. After adding all the functions to the Commands list, the macro is complete.

  2. In Create Viewer & Design, create a button and add a macro to the Button Action properties (see page 158) by selecting Macro under Devices (see Device Functions, page 163 for details).

ATEN VK112EU - To create a macro: - 3

Scheduled Events

You can have one or a series of tasks execute recurringly on specified time of the day. Each project can store up to 60 scheduled events. Note that this feature is not applicable to Control Pads.

Creating a Scheduled Event

  1. In the Design tab, click Library and click Schedule

  2. Select a controller to which you wish to create an event.

VK1200-ID02 + Create New

  1. Click . A new event window appears.
  2. Name the event.
  3. Click to specify a recurring schedule for the event.
  4. Configure event actions.

a) In the Device column, select a device.
b) In the Function column, double-click the desired functions. The corresponding commands appear in the Commands column. For details on what each function does, see Device Functions, page 163.
c) In the Commands column, double-click each command to configure the settings.

  1. Optionally add system functions. For detailed information, see Applications of Advanced Functions, page 168.

  2. These commands will initiate in the listed order. To change the order of the commands, click .

Duplicating a Scheduled Event

To duplicate a created event to another controller, right-click an event from the event list, mouse over Duplicate, and then select a target controller.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name New Event Duplicate VK2200-ID01 VK1200-ID02 VK0200-ID03

ATEN VK112EU - Duplicating a Scheduled Event - 2

Variables

Understanding Variables

A Variable is a value holder that stores a single device setting (e.g. speaker volume) and can be assigned to multiple control objects (e.g. a slider button, a maximum volume button, and a minimum volume button). This way, when a device setting is adjusted via a Viewer object, the new setting will be loaded into this Variable and then reflected to all Viewer objects that use this Variable. Each project can store up to 128 Variables.

Below is a Variable list that has two variables created, temperature and speaker volume, for devices controlled by VK1200-ID02.

VK1200-ID02 + Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

This feature is useful for automatic synchronization of device settings, especially when you have two or more objects in a Viewer controlling a single device setting. Take the example of controlling a speaker volume on a Viewer. On your Viewer, you may have a slider bar which you use to adjust the volume, a button that sets the speaker to its maximum volume, and another button for minimum volume. When you tap the maximum volume button, you would like the following status changes reflected on the Viewer:

  • The maximum volume button shows a toggle-on status
  • The minimum volume button synchronized with this setting and shows a toggle-off status
  • The slider bar synchronizes with this setting and moves to its highest volume

Creating a Variable for Devices that Return Feedback Messages

Follow the steps below to configure a Variable if the Variable (device setting) is for a device that returns feedback messages to the controller.

  1. Create a Variable for the device setting (e.g. speaker volume).

a) In the Design tab, click Library.

b) In the pop-up window, click the Variable icon.

c) Using the indicated drop-down list, select the controller which controls the target device. The variables created for the devices managed by the selected controller are listed.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

d) Click . A Variable setup page appears.

e) In the setup page, configure the following settings.

◆ Name: Type a name for the Variable.

- String format: Select the string format for the target device.

Setting range: Type two numbers to define the range for the variable. Valid numbers include negative numbers and numbers that contain one decimal place.

Note: If one of the numbers contains a decimal place (e.g. -5.0), make sure to specify the other number in the same format (e.g. 10.0).

- Unicode: (Only available for string variables) Select this setting for multilingual text to be encoded and represented correctly in the variable.

◆ Default value: Type a default for the setting.

◆ Description: Optionally add additional information for the variable.

Your settings may look like this:

Synced Variables Create a synced variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A synced variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name AUDIO ASCII 0 ~ 10 Default Value 5

  1. Configure control objects for the Viewer. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 119.

a) In the Design tab, add control objects to your Viewer.

Note: The Variable function is only applicable to toggle buttons, basic-mode slider bars, and radio groups of normal buttons. Configure the Mode setting before you proceed.

Properties Mode ▼ Basic Slider Bar Name Font Arial

b) For a slider bar object, click it in the Viewer page and configure the Value settings in Properties.
c) In Properties, click Set Sync Condition and select the variable you created using the drop-down list.

Edit Sync Condition Sync slider bar with the specified variable when AUDIO None AUDIO Create Variable ≥ 0 and ≤ 10 Remove Condition Show More

  1. Create a Monitor to set up the conditions for which the device sends its latest setting to the variable. For detailed steps, see Creating a Bypass Monitor, page 201.

Creating a Variable for Devices that Do Not Return Feedback Messages

Follow the steps below to configure a Variable if the Variable (device setting) is for a device that does not return feedback messages to the controller.

  1. Create a Variable for the device setting (e.g. speaker volume).

Synced Variables Create a synced variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A synced variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name AUDIO ASCII 0 ~ 10 Default Value 5 Execute commands with no conditions Execute commands with the specified conditions Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 840T-1(Serial) minitor2(Serial) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label m1 0db vol test* m1 10db m1 -10db m1 5db m1 vol+1 m1 vol-1 m1-5db vol* vool** Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port(3) 840T-1 volVariableValue

a) In the Design tab, click Library.
b) Click the Variable icon.
c) Using the indicated drop-down list, select the controller which controls the target device. The variables created for the devices managed by the selected controller are listed.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

d) Click . A Variable setup page appears.
e) In the Setup page, configure the following settings.

  • Name: Type a name for the Variable.
  • String format: Select the string format for the target device.
    Setting range: Type two numbers to define the range for the variable. Valid numbers include negative numbers and numbers that contain one decimal place.

Note: If one of the numbers contains a decimal place (e.g. -5.0), make sure to specify the other number in the same format (e.g. 10.0).

- Unicode: (Only available for string variables) Select this setting for multilingual text to be encoded and represented correctly in the variable.

Note: This feature is only effective if the target controller uses firmware v3.6 or later.

♦ Default value: Type a default for the setting.
- Description: Optionally add additional information for the variable.
- Select a command execution type.

  • Execute commands with no conditions: Execute the command (action) when the value of the specified Variable changes.
  • Execute commands with the specified conditions: Execute the corresponding command (action) when the value of the Variable matches.

  • Configure control objects for the Viewer.

a) Add a control object to the Viewer. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 119.
Note: Make sure to configure the mode setting before proceeding to the next step.
b) For a slider bar, click it and configure value settings in Properties.
c) Click Set Variable, and then double-click the Variable you created in step 1.
d) In Properties, click Set Sync Condition and select the Variable you created using the drop-down list.

Edit Sync Condition Sync slider bar with the specified variable when AUDIO None AUDIO Create Variable 0 and 10 Remove Condition Show More

  1. Repeat steps (a) to (d) with each of the objects. If you select Execute commands with the specified conditions, follow the steps below to add commands.

a) Refer to step 4 to first configure the control objects.

b) Click Library, click the Variable (●) icon, and then click the Variable you created in step 1.

c) Click the drop-down list below the Execute commands with the specified conditions option and select a condition.

d) Add an action (command) when this condition is met. Select a device, double-click a desired function, and then double-click the command to configure the setting.

In the case of speaker volume, when the volume changes to 0 (i.e. the condition is Variable = 0), the action will be “to change the speaker volume to 0”, as illustrated below.

Synced Variables Create a synced variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A synced variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name AUDIO ASCII 0 10 Default Value 5 Execute commands with no conditions Execute commands with the specified conditions Variable = 0 Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 840T-1(Serial) minitor2(Serial) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag m1 0db vol test* m1 10db m1 -10db m1 5db m1 vol-1 m1 vol-1 m1-5db vol* vool** Serial Raw(ASCII) (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port(3) 840T-1 vol0

e) Repeat steps 2(c) and 2(d) to add one or more actions to each condition.

  1. If you select Execute commands with no conditions, follow the steps below to add commands.

a) In the Device list, click to select the device. In this example, the mixer, 840T-1(Serial), is selected.
b) Double-click the action (command) and change the value type to Variable Value.

(Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) 840T-1 vol (2) Variable Value Library Value Flag Variable Variable Value

Creating a Button for Bypassing Feedback to a Variable

Instead of creating a monitor event which automatically monitors the specified parameter at a defined interval, you can save the controller bandwidth by creating a button which performs the monitoring and saves the feedback to a variable only when pressed.

  1. Create a variable for storing the received feedback. Select STRING for the variable. Configure other settings as required.

Variable Create a variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name NewVariable STRING Default Value NULL Description

a) In the Design tab, click Library.
b) Click the Variable icon.
c) Using the indicated drop-down list, select the controller which controls the target device. The variables created for the devices managed by the selected controller are listed.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

d) Click . A Variable setup page appears.
e) In the Setup page, configure the following settings.

◆ Name: Type a name for the Variable.
◆ String format: Select STRING.
- Unicode: (Only available for string variables) Select this setting for multilingual text to be encoded and represented correctly in the variable.
♦ Default value: Type a default for the setting.

◆ Description: Optionally add additional information for the variable.
- Select a command execution type.

  • Execute commands with no conditions: Execute the command (action) when the value of the specified Variable changes.
  • Execute commands with the specified conditions: Execute the corresponding command (action) when the Variable matches

  • In a Viewer page, create a button object.

  • Configure its button actions.

a) Add a command for receiving feedback.
b) Select Condition and then drag-and-drop a Feedback If command under your feedback command.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 Set Variable Function Variable If Variable Else If Variable Else Feedback If Feedback Else If Feedback Else Commands Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) Data: wait 0.30 s If -Feedback bypass_ equal to include bypass

c) Set the feedback to bypass.

  1. Add a variable command. Select a variable to store the feedback and then select Bypass.

Button Action Device Room-1 Function Commands VR200-D81 Variable # Variable Else # Variable Else Feedback # Feedback Else # Feedback Else Set Flag Condition Link Change Rating State Serial ASCII on VK200-D81 Port(?) Data: wait 0.30 sec #Feedback bypass (ASCII) Set New/Variable Bypass FEEDBACK_RESULT (STRING)

Timers

A timer event is used to initiate a device action as soon as the defined countdown time is up. The advantage of using a timer event, as opposed to a combination of delay command and device command, is that it saves time by executing the defined action while other actions (commands) within the series execute.

On top of initiating a specified action, you can also create additional controls on the Viewer to manually restart or stop the action. For example, for a start meeting button, you would like to initiate the following series of actions when triggered:

Sequence of ActionTarget DeviceDevice Action Requirements
1projectorTurn on the projector It takes8 seconds for the projector to turn on and get ready.
2 Set the projector to switchto its HDMI sourceThis action can only be initiated when the projector is turned on.
2 ATEN Matrix SwitchDisplay input 1 to display 1 via ATEN Matrix Switch (VM5808H)This action is independent of the previous one, and can be initiated at the same time.
3 projector screen Bringdown the projector screen-
4 air conditioner Turn onair conditioner-
5 lighting system Turn onthe lights-

Among these actions, action #2 (switching source on a projector) can be designed as a timer event because:

  • it needs a countdown (of 8 seconds) before the action can be initiated
  • the remaining actions can be initiated without action #2 being completed

The configuration for the start meeting button is as follows, with the projector source switching configured as a timer event:

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Macro Timer Set Variable Function VK2200-ID01 Commands (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (3) EB Series Power ON Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start start in 10 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (4) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Relay Pulse on VK2200-ID01 Port (1) 0.1 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (5) CoolMasterNet allon (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (7) EZ-5645S Light Control(ID00)(chanel/ALL) (on/offON)

Configuring a Timer Event

  1. Create a timer event in the Library.

a) In Configurator, go to 3. Design > Library 📄, and then click Timer in the pop-up window. This screen appears.

VK2200-ID01 + Create New Name

b) Select a controller to which you wish to create the timer event to.

VK2200-ID01 + Create New Name

c) Click . The Timer window appears.

d) Add a device action (command). For more details about commands (device actions), see Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions, page 160. For example, for a projector to switch its input source to HDMI, click the device in the Device column and then double-click the input source

command from the Function column. Double-click the added command to select HDMI for the Input Source.

Timor Meeting Start Name Default (Sec.) Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2200-ID01 A/V Mute * VM5808H(Serial) A/V Mute GET CoolMasterNet(Serial) Aspect Setting * EZ-5545S(Serial) Aspect Setting * EB Series(Serial) Input Source * (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Input Source HDMI1

To see only the added actions (commands) in this view, click

ATEN VK112EU - Configuring a Timer Event - 4

e) Rename the timer event and configure the countdown duration.

Timer Meeting Start Name 10 Default (Sec.) Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) A/V Mute * A/V Mute GET Aspect Setting * Aspect Setting GET Freeze * Freeze GET Input Source * Lamp Hour Power ^ (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Input Source HDMI1

  1. Apply the timer to a control element (e.g. a button or a slider bar).

a) Click the target control element.

Example: a meeting start button
Home Page COMPANY LOGO HERE START MEETING

b) In Action settings, click the target device (for the timer event), click Timer, and then double-click a function to add a timer event.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Macro Timer Set Variable Set Flag Condition Link Link SubPage Function VK2200-ID01 Timar VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start starts 10 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Power ON (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (4) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Relay Pulse on VK2200-ID01 Port (1) 0.1 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (5) CoolMasterNet allon (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (7) EZ-5645S Light Control(ID00)(channel/ALL) (on/offON) Commands (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Power ON Timar VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start starts 10 Sec

c) To configure the timer, double-click the added timer in the Commands column and select from the drop-down menus.

(Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Power ON - Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start start in Default Value 10 Sec. (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (4) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Relay Pulse on VK2200-ID01 Port (1) 0.1 Sec

The following settings are available:

  • controller:
  • timer: to change the current timer to another that is already created in the Library.
  • timer type: you can change the action from starting a specified action to stop or restart.
    ◆ countdown duration

The timer action starts counting down as soon as the associated control is triggered, and the action initiates when the countdown time is up.

  1. (Optional) Create another control (e.g. a button) for stopping or restarting the timer.

a) Add the control element to the Viewer page.
b) Click the control element, and add the timer event you created in step 1, and double-click the command to select Restart or Stop from the dropdown list.

- Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start restart start stop restart

Duplicating a Created Timer

To duplicate a created timer to another controller, right-click a timer, mouse over Duplicate, and then select a target controller.

VK0200-ID03 Create New Name New Timer New Timer (1) Duplicate VK2200-ID01 VK1200-ID02 VK0200-ID03

Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon™

Overview

Unizon™

Unizon ^TM is a server-based software for centralized monitoring and control of standalone ATEN Video Matrix and ATEN-controller-managed AV devices, including ATEN and third-party devices. One ATEN control system allows management from up to two Unizon ^TM servers. Note that a license is required for using Unizon ^TM . For more information, see ATEN Unizon ^TM User Manual.

Monitor ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™

When an ATEN-controller-managed AV device is added to Unizon ^™ , the following information is available in the Unizon ^™ platform:

♦ connection status with Unizon™
- current IP address
- firmware version

◆ license usage (only applicable to ATEN controllers)

You can also create parameters to be monitored via Unizon ^™ . For example, you may want to monitor the total hours used on a projector lamp so that you can arrange for replacement in advance when the accumulated lamp hour reaches a specified number. For setup details, see Creating a Monitor Item, page 231.

Control ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™

You can remotely operate ATEN-controller-managed devices via Unizon ^™ , such as switching video sources on displays, changing the resolution setting, etc., by creating control items in the controller project file. For setup details, see Creating a Control Item, page 234.

Enabling Monitoring and Control via Unizon™

Follow the steps below to enable monitoring and control of controller-managed devices via Unizon ^TM .

  1. In Configurator, select devices to allow management via Unizon ^TM .

a) Open the target project and go to the Device tab.
b) In the Unizon column, select devices for remote management via Unizon™. For example:

VK2100-ID01 Device Configuration VK2100-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 VM0808H RS232 Room-1 ✓ Serial 2 VM1616T RS232 Room-1 ✓ Serial 3 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 I/O 1 Switch Output ▼ Room-1 I/O 2 None Output ▼ Room-1 I/O 3 None Output ▼ Room-1 I/O 4 None Output ▼ Room-1 IR 1 VS481A IR ▼ Room-1 IR 2 None IR ▼ Room-1 IR 3 None IR ▼ Room-1 IR 4 None IR ▼ Room-1 Relay 1 Switch-1 Room-1 Relay 2 None Room-1 Relay 3 None Room-1 Relay 4 None Room-1 Ethernet 1 VE8950 TELNET Room-1 ✓ Ethernet 2 VE8900 TELNET Room-1 Ethernet 3 B96 ONVIF Room-1

  1. (Optional) Create parameters for monitoring and/or control. For detailed steps, see:

♦ Creating a Monitor Item, page 231
♦ Creating a Control Item, page 234

  1. Upload the project to the controller.
  2. On Unizon™'s web interface, add the controller. For details, see ATEN Unizon™ User Manual.

Creating a Monitor Item

  1. Open the project file, go to Design >Unizon, and click on the device category of the target device to open the configuration page.

Example: To add a monitor item to a third-party projector, click Projector.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Controller... Viewer ... Unizon Projector Projector Room Device Name Add Function Item Room-1 NP-PX Series

  1. In the configuration page, click

and then select Item +

Add Monitor Item in a pop-up dialog box. A new monitor item is added.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Monitor Item Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H Sync Variable VM1616T Sync Variable

  1. Double-click the header Monitor Item to rename the parameter.

Example: Rename it to Lamp Hour.

Projector Projector Room Device Name Lamp Hour Add Function Item Room-1 NP-PX Series Sync Variable

  1. Create a variable to store the value of the parameter and optionally configure alert settings.

Example: Create a variable to store the accumulated lamp hour and set up an alert at a specific number.

a) Under the monitor item you just created, click Sync Variable. The Properties panel appears on the right.

b) In the Properties panel, click Set Sync Condition. The Edit Sync Condition dialog box appears.

c) In the General tab, click the first drop-down menu and select Create Variable to create a variable. For details about creating variables, see Variables, page 214.

d) In the General tab, select the variable you just created and configure related settings. For example:

Edit Sync Condition General Monitoring Step 1 Select synchronized variables. Use LampHour Step 2 Variable display Select expression Raw Data Step 3 Edit label unit style hr Ex: % dB... Show More Save Cancel

e) Optionally set up alerts for this monitor item. For example:

Edit Sync Condition General Monitoring Step 1 ✓ Set alert levels Step 2 Edit Sync Condition ● Moderate alert IV 2000 Add Condition ● Critical alert IV 2200 Add Condition Show More Save Cancel

Creating a Control Item

  1. Open the project file, go to Design >Unizon, and click on the device category of the target device to open the configuration page.

Example: To add a control item to a Video Matrix, click Video Matrix Switch.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Control... Viewer... Unizon Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Unizon Scenario Networked AV Video Matrix Switch Projector Room Device Name Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H VM1616T

  1. In the configuration page, click

and then select Item

Add Control Item in a pop-up dialog box. A new control item is added.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Control Item Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H VM1616T

  1. Double-click the header Control Item to rename the parameter.

Example: Rename it to Output 1.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H VM1616T

  1. Add and configure control options to this item.

Example: Create input 1 to 4 as options for switch the source on output 1.

a) Click

ATEN VK112EU - Creating a Control Item - 4

b) In the pop-up dialog box, type the name of the control option and click Create. Proceed to create all the control options as required.

Example: Type Input 1 and click Create. Add Input 2, 3, and 4.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 VM1616T Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

c) Click Input 1 and add the action in the Action panel. Proceed to configure each control action.

Note:

  • The same entries are created for all devices in the list. Skip this step if the control action does not apply.
  • For full details about configuring control actions, see Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions, page 160.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function VK2100-ID01 VK236-ID01 VM0808H(Serial) VM1616T(Serial) NP-PX Series(Serial) VS481A(IR) Switch-1(Relay) Switch(IO) Implement port 1 connected load a Saved Profile * Manually implement the best Mute Output Port * Power off detection Power on detection save the current connection c Switch Input Port * to Output P Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01

Removing a Monitor / Control Item

To remove a monitor or control item, right-click the header and select Delete.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Room-1 VM0808H Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 VM1616T Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Delete Rename

The Upload Tab

The Upload page allows you to upload Viewers and/or back up projects to controllers.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Start the controller search by IP address via Auto Search or manually. Intelligent Search Auto Search Search for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP address Please select the viewer to upload. Edit Access Key VK1100-ID02 Viewer1 VK2100-01 Please check the connection and controller ID Upload to Controller Upload this project along with the Viewer

To back up a project and its Viewers to a controller:

  1. Browse for the ATEN controller where you wish to save the configured Viewers.

  2. Auto Search: Browsers for controllers on the same LAN with the Configurator.

  3. Search by IP address: Use this function to browse for controllers that are on different LANs to the Configurator.

  4. Verify the selected controller and viewer and configure the selection if required.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Start the controller search by IP address via Auto Search or manually. Intelligent Search Auto Search Search for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP address Please select the viewer to upload. Edit Access Key VK1100-ID02 Viewer1 VK2100-01 Please check the connection and controller ID Upload to Controller Upload this project along with the Viewer

  • Controller highlighted black: This is the controller that is found in the network and its ID matches the one you specified in this project file. The viewers created for the controller are listed below this item.
  • Controller highlighted gray: This is the controller that also exists in the network, but does not match the controller ID specified in this project file.

  • Optionally click on the following to configure password authentication settings.

Note: Due to security concerns, the access key of any ATEN controller will need to be modified at least once before the controller can be accessed for any of its functions. If you have not modified the access key, the upload will not be performed. To resolve this issue, log in to the controller's web interface and follow the on-screen prompt to modify the access key.

- Edit Access Key: Click to edit the access key you entered for uploading Viewers to the controller and download Viewers from a mobile device.

- Note: A valid access key should only contain upper-case alphabets,

lower-case alphabets, and/or numerals. : An access key is required to upload Viewers to the controller and download Viewers from a mobile device.

◆ : An access key is not required to upload Viewers to the controller and download Viewers from a mobile device.

- : The access key has been changed on the controller's web interface (Dashboard). To change the lock status, click on the icon and type the new access key to proceed.

4. Click Upload to Controller.

Note: By default, the project file is uploaded along with your selected Viewers. To only upload the selected Viewers, click Also upload project file to disable the function.

Viewing Controller Information

Click to view the controller's information.

♦ IP Address: Displays the IP address.
♦ MAC Address: Displays the MAC address.
◆ License: Displays the number of licenses available and in use.

  • Select License: Allows you to load a new license file.
  • Reset License: Resets all license(s) in use by mobile devices. This will disconnect all mobile device connections to the controller.
  • Firmware Version: Displays the firmware version.

◆ Capacity: Displays the amount of space available for uploading Viewers.
- Viewers: Lists the Viewers currently stored on the controller.

- Remove Viewer: Click the trash can icon to remove the Viewer stored on the controller.

- Project: Lists the project file currently stored in the controller.

Chapter 5

ATEN Database Generator

Overview

The ATEN Database Generator is a repository that allows you to establish and store commands for operating devices managed by ATEN Control System, and reuse them when configuring Viewers.

Accessing the Database Generator

In ATEN Configurator, goto Tools > Database Generator. The following window appears with the Add Device to My Library dialog box opened if you are accessing the Database Generator for the first time.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxxx Ethernet xxxx Edit AUDIO Aten AKURA ACTION A MARK A MARK 123 Add Device to My Library Add New Device Add Device from ATEN Device Add Device from Driver File Do not show this dialog box again. Close Export Selected Device Delete Selected Device

Menu Description
Add New Device Confgure a custom hardware device to add to My Ωibrary.
Add Device from ATEN Device ΩibraryAdd devices from the ATEN Device Ωibrary to My Ωibrary.
Add Device from Driver FileAdd devices from a database file (*.vkd) to My Ωibrary.
Check Box Click Do not show this dialog again to prevent the dialog from appearing when the Database Generator is opened. Use the Preferences menu option to bring the dialog window back.
Close Click the Closebutton to exit the dialog window.
Add New Device Confgure a custom hardware device to add to My Ωibrary.

My Library

My Library allows you to create custom hardware devices which can be selected to configure ports on the controller. My Library lists all the hardware devices that you have created, added, and edited using the Database Generator. You can create new hardware devices or add existing devices from the ATEN Device Library (page 266). These devices can then be selected from My Device Library for use.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand ▼ Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxx Ethernet xxx Edit AUDIO AUDIO MIXER Serial 1 Aten Control Box VK2100 Ethernet 2.4 AKURA Curtain ssssss Ethernet sss ACTION Display sss Relay 111 A MARK Audio Processor 111 IR 111 A MARK Digital Conference S... xxxxxx DO 123 123 sdf 456 Ethernet 1 Export Selected Device Delete Selected Device

ATEN Device Library ATEN Device Library My Device Library Create Device IR Relay Ethernet Version Property ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808H V2.2.219 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808 V1.1.106 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404H V2.2.213 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404 V1.0.062

Function Tabs

More functions can be accessed from the function tabs toward the top of the My Library window. Refer to the table below for information about each function.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand▼ Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxx Ethernet xxx Edit AUDIO AUDIO MIXER Serial 1 Aten Control Box VK2100 Ethernet 2.4 AKURA Curtain ssssss Ethernet sss

Tab Description

File The File menu provides options to:

  • Add New Device: Configure a custom hardware device to add to Device Ωlibrary.
  • Add Device from ATEN Device Library: Add devices from the ATEN Device Ωibrary to My Ωibrary.
  • Add Device from Driver File: Add devices from a database file (*.vkd) to My Ωibrary.
  • Export My Library: Saves My Ωibrary as a database file (*.vkd) that can be imported later.
  • Export Selected Device: Saves the selected device(s) as a database file (*.vkd) that can be imported later.
  • Controller Connection: Searches for a controller to test the connection or run the learning mode for the IR port.
  • Quit: Exits the program.
Tab Description
Edit The Edit menu provides options to:Delete: Deletes the selected devices from the database.Duplicate: Makes a copy of the selected device(s) and adds them to the library with the extension “-Copy”Preferences: Provides options to:Set the LanguageShow Add Device dialog on startupShow IR Learning tipsSet the IR Learning Timeout - how long to attempt a connection to an IR device before IR learning stops.
Ωlibrary Provides a list of the Ωlibraries that you can open to select devices from and edit or add to My Ωlibrary. The libraries that are listed here appear when you select a database using Add Device from Driver File.
Help Provides support and software version information.

Controls on the My Library Window

You can add new devices by creating a new device, duplicating an existing device, selecting a device from the ATEN Library or importing a driver file. Use the check boxes to select individual devices or All to select the entire list.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxxx Ethernet xxxx Edit AUDIO AUDIO MIXER Serial 1 Aten Control Box VK2100 Ethernet 2.4 AKURA Curtain ssssss Ethernet sss ACTION Display sss Relay 111 AMARK Audio Processor 111 IR 111 AMARK Digital Conference S... xxxxxx DO 123 123 sdf 456 Ethernet 1 Export Selected Device Delete Selected Device

ATEN VK112EU - Controls on the My Library Window - 2

Click to add a new custom device to the database.

ATEN VK112EU - Controls on the My Library Window - 3

Select a device and click this icon to create a duplicate.

ATEN VK112EU - Controls on the My Library Window - 4

Click to add and edit a device from the ATEN Device Library.

ATEN VK112EU - Controls on the My Library Window - 5

Click to add a device from the driver file.

EDIT

Select a device and click Edit to change the settings.

Key in word strings then click Search to find a device.

  • Click All, Serial, IR, DO, Relay or Ethernet to filter the list by type.
  • Click Brand, Category, Model, Type or Version to sort the devices.
  • Click Export Selected Device to save the selected devices.
  • Click Delete Selected Devices to remove the selected devices.

Editing / Adding a New Device

To edit or add a device to My Library, do the following:

  1. From the menu select File → Add New Device, or select a device from My Library and click Edit.
  2. Under General, use the drop-down menus or type in the Brand Name, Category, Model and Version.
    Note: The Category determines what buttons are auto generated when a Viewer page is created for the device.
  3. Use the History button to open the Version History editor and make notes about the updates being made to the device configuration. You can create and use different versions of the same device and track the changes. The version history can be viewed and different versions selected from the ATEN Configurator, under device Properties.
  4. Check the hardware type and configure the device. ATEN database generator supports serial, IR, digital output, relay, and Ethernet devices. For more information about configuring each of these device type devices, refer to the following sections.

♦ Serial: See Serial Device, page 249.
♦ IR: See IR Device, page 253.
♦ Digital output: See Digital Output Device, page 255.
♦ Relay: See Relay Device, page 256.
◆ Ethernet: See Ethernet Device, page 257.

Serial Device

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help ATEN Presentation Switch VP1420 Save Save As Cancel General Brand ATEN Category Presentation Switch Model VP1420 Version V1.1.103 History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Baud Rate 19200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Panty None Flow Control None Mode RS232 Listen Advanced Function List Serial R NO Entry Ethernet String Format HEX ASCII + Function ▲ Command Message Display mode * displaymode [matrix, mirror]x0D'x0A Edit Send Echo * echo [on,off]x0D'x0A Edit Send Get Device Status read/x0D'x0A Edit Send Get FW Version read version/x0D'x0A Edit Send Get Output Audio... mute o[all=*,sys,01-03]x0D'x0A Edit Send Get Output Audio... read o[all=*,01-03] connection Edit Send Get Output Scale... scaling o[all=*,01-02]x0D'x0A Edit Send Get Output Video... read o[all=*,01-02] connection Edit Send Get Standby Stat... standby/x0D'x0A Edit Send Mute Output ** mute o[all=*,sys,01-03] [on,off]x0D'x0A Edit Send Power on power on/x0D'x0A Edit Send Standby * standby [on,off]x0D'x0A Edit Send Switch Input * to ... sw i[01-04] o[all=*,01-02]x0D'x0A Edit Send Switch mode * swmode plugin [auto,off]x0D'x0A Edit Send

ATEN VK112EU - Serial Device - 2

Click to add an Action.

ATEN VK112EU - Serial Device - 3

Click to create a duplicate of the Action.

ATEN VK112EU - Serial Device - 4

Click to delete the selected action.

ATEN VK112EU - Serial Device - 5

Click to enter a string within () which allows the text to be edited in the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list (see page 160).

ATEN VK112EU - Serial Device - 6

Click to add a drop menu into a Command string, then enter the ber sequence in the brackets []. The Function name must include sterisk (*) for each drop menu in the Command string. The drop- n menu will appear where the (*) is entered in the Function name.

ATEN VK112EU - Serial Device - 7

Click to add an Enter into the Command string.

Right-click one or more serial commands to copy and paste them as Ethernet commands of all protocols (except HTTP/HTTPS):

Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet String Format HEX Copy Paste Duplicate Delete Message Echo* Edit Send Get Device Sta Edit Send Get FW Version read version\x0D\x0A Edit Send Get Output Audio... mute o[all=*,sys,01-03]'x0D\x0A Edit Send

- Settings – Use the drop-down menus to set the: Baud Rate, Data Bit, Stop Bit, Parity, Flow Control and Mode settings.

- Listen – Use this function to create a list of device parameters that you want the controller to monitor by receiving notifications on setting or status changes of the specified parameters.

Note: To set up queries for the status of a device parameter, go to the Function List and click +to add the querying action as a command.

- Advanced

  • Delay Interval – Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.
  • Feedback Timeout – Sets the maximum interval that the controller allows in between parts of a feedback message. If the controller has not received any feedback for longer than the specified Feedback Timeout, the controller identifies the last bit of the received information as the end of a feedback message.
  • Receive Duration – Sets the allowed duration of time for the serial device to receive a complete message from the controller.
  • Checksum Type – To have the checksum automatically calculated and filled in by the controller, select Modbus for this setting.
  • Keep Connection Alive – Specify an interval that the controller waits before sending the specified command to test if the connection to the serial device is up or down.

- Function List – Use this section to configure the device functions by adding actions to the list.

- String Format – Use the buttons to select HEX or ASCII. To use HEX strings with ASCII one, select ASCII and type \x before typing the HEX strings.

Note: HEX strings are also supported under the ASCII format.

  • Function – Lists the actions created for a device. A Function name must include an asterisk (*) if you are adding a drop menu to the Command string. Double-click to edit the function name.
  • Command – Shows the command string created for the action. Double-click to edit the string.
  • Message – The Message column is used to create and store feedback and/or queries for the corresponding command.

- For more information about adding feedback, see Testing Commands, page 262.

- For more information about creating queries, see Configuring Queries, page 264.

- Click Send to connect to a controller and test the typed command.

Please select a controller. Intelligent Search Intelligent Search Searches for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP Address ID-1 VK2100 IP Address MAC Address Firmware 00:10:74:b2:01:74 2.7.262.002 Serial OK Cancel

- Click to select a controller from the list. Use the Refresh button to refresh the list. To browse for controllers in the LAN, click the Intelligent Search button or type the IP address of the controller.

- Click OK to proceed to test the command. For details, see Testing Commands, page 262.

Text Command Tools

The following formats allow you to enter command strings with text that provide special features. These formats work in Serial and Ethernet commands.

- () entering text in () allows the command to be edited in the VK6000.

Example: (A1 A9) (A8 B6) – this command string will provide two editable text boxes from the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list which allow you to change the command string:

3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (2) 3 Function name A1 A9 A8 B6

◆ = using the equals sign before a text command allows you to type in words which will show up in a drop-down menu to describe the command, rather than show the text command itself.

Example: [Power On=0A, Power Off=0B, Standby Mode=0C] – this command string will provide a drop-down menu with three choices using the text before the equal signs to describe each command – from the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list:

3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (2) 1 query power status of the device POWER ON POWER ON POWER OFF STANDBY MOD

◆ “” quotation marks allow three symbols (, = @) to be added to a command that uses the equal sign as described in the example above. Three symbols not allowed within the quotation marks include (“” () []). Quotation marks can be used to the left of= in a HEX command; on either side of= in an ASCII command; and anywhere in an Ethernet command.

HEX Example: ["Power=On" = 0A, "POWER=Off" = 0B]

ASCII Example: ["Power=On" =pwn, "POWER=Off" =pwf]

In the HEX example, “Power=On” allows the equal sign to be inserted before =0A. If the quotes are removed, the command Power=On=0A would fail as an Invalid String.

IR Device

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help Audio Conferencing Save Cancel General Brand Category Audio Conferencing Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Repeat 2 Times (Default) Advanced Function List Serial IR 00 Relay Ethernet Quick Mode + Function ▲ IR / Pronto Code Status Function name 1 00 00 00 6C 00 00 0... Learned Learn Test Function name 2 IR Learn Test

ATEN VK112EU - IR Device - 2

Click to add an Action.

ATEN VK112EU - IR Device - 3

Click to create a duplicate of the Action

ATEN VK112EU - IR Device - 4

Click to delete the selected action.

- Settings – Use the drop-down menu to set the Repeat setting (number of times a signal is sent): 1 Time, 2 Times or 3 Times (Default).

◆ Advanced

  • Delay Interval – Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the IR device.
  • Receive Duration – Sets the allowed duration of time for the IR device to receive a complete message from the controller.

- Function List – Use this section to configure the IR functions by adding actions to the list.

- Click to add an action. In the pop-up dialog box:

- Auto Learn: Select this option to add the action through learning.

- Manual Input: Select this option to add the action using Pronto hex codes. Double-click the command to enter the Pronto code for the device.

Note: To obtain Pronto codes for a control system managed, third-party device, search Internet forums or the manufacturer's product web pages.

  • Quick Mode – Click to run Learning Mode for all IR actions in the Function List. When the Quick Mode window opens, click Start, a pop-up window appears to select a controller. Check a box to select a controller and click Select. Click Start a second time to run Quick Mode using the Learn instructions below.
  • Function – Lists the actions created for a device. Double-click to edit the Function the name.
  • Status – Reports the status (Tested, Failed, Learned) of the Learn and Test buttons.
  • Learn – Use to transfer commands from an IR remote to the Control Box. Click Learn. The Select Controller window appears.

- Click to select a controller from the list. Use the Refresh button to refresh the list. To browse for controllers in the LAN, click the Intelligent Search button or type the IP address of the controller.

Please select a controller. Intelligent Search Intelligent Search Searches for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP Address ID-1 VK2100 IP Address MAC Address Firmware 00:10:74:b2:01:74 2.7.262.002

- Click Learn a second time to start learning mode. When the IR Learn LED flashes green, point the IR remote at the Control Box's front panel IR Receiver and push a button on the remote. Press the button on the remote just as you would when using it with the hardware device. If the device responds to a long hold or quick tap of the remote's button then you must press the button in the same manor (long hold or quick tap) when it using for Learning mode. The Control Box will beep and the Learn LED will light solid (then turn off) when IR learning is successful. The LED also turns off if Learning mode times out.

- Test – Use to test if commands are sent successfully to the Control Box and hardware device.

- Click Test, a pop-up window appears to select a controller and the IR port. Check a box to choose a controller and use the drop-down menu to select the IR port and then click Select.

- Click Test a second time to test if the IR data transmits successfully to the Control Box. Check the hardware device to confirm that it responded appropriately.

- The Status column reports the Learn and Test results.

Digital Output Device

AUDIO SOURCE Projector Save Save As Cancel General Brand AUDIO SOURCE Category Projector Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Advanced Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet + Function ▲ Command Function name 1 Open

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Output Device - 2

Click to add an Action.

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Output Device - 3

Click to create a duplicate of the Action

ATEN VK112EU - Digital Output Device - 4

Click to delete the selected Action.

  • Advanced – Click to use the Delay Interval drop-down menu to set a timed delay for each command before it is sent to the device.
  • Function List – Use this section to configure the Digital Output device functions by adding actions to the list.

◆ Function – Lists the actions created for a device. Double-click to edit the Function name.

- Command – Shows the command selected for the action. Click the drop-down menu to select an action (Open, Close, Toggle, Pulse).

Relay Device

AUDIO SOURCE Projector Save Save As Cancel General Brand AUDIO SOURCE Category Projector Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Advanced Function List Serial 12 DO Relay Ethernet Function ▲ Command Function name 1 -- + / - /

ATEN VK112EU - Relay Device - 2

Click to add an Action.

ATEN VK112EU - Relay Device - 3

Click to create a duplicate of the Action

ATEN VK112EU - Relay Device - 4

Click to delete the selected Action.

  • Advanced – Click to use the Delay Interval drop-down menu to set a timed delay for each command before it is sent to the device.
  • Function List – Use this section to configure the Relay device functions by adding actions to the list.

  • Function – Lists the actions created for a device. Double-click to edit the Function name.

  • Command – Shows the command selected for the action. Click the drop-down menu to select an action (Open, Close, Toggle, Pulse).

Ethernet Device

General Brand AUDIO SOURCE Category Projector Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Protocol TELNET Port 23 Advanced Function List Serial IR DU Relay Ethernet + Function ▲ Command Feedback Function name 1 Send

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet Device - 2

Click to add an Action.

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet Device - 3

Click to create a duplicate of the Action.

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet Device - 4

Click to delete the selected action.

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet Device - 5

Click to enter a string within () which allows the text to be edited in the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list (see page 160).

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet Device - 6

Click to add a drop menu into a Command string, then enter the ber sequence in the brackets []. The Function name must include sterisk (*) for each drop menu in the Command string.

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet Device - 7

Click to add an Enter into the Command string.

Right-click one or more Ethernet commands (except HTTP/HTTPS) to copy and paste them as serial commands:

Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet + T1 Function ▲ Copy Command Feedback Trun on OutputPart* Paste sw a[01-04] cnlxDv0A Duplicate Delete

For special command string tools, see Text Command Tools, page 252.

- Settings

♦ Protocol – Click the drop-down list to select a protocol for the device
- Port – Type the port number for the device.
- Advanced – Click to configure the following settings. The supported settings may vary depending on the device protocol and authentication type.

Delay Interval Sets atime delay for each command before they are sent to the device.
Delay Time after ΩoginSets a time interval that the controller waits to request for login credentials of a device after establishing connection with the device.
Receive Duration Setsthe allowed duration of time for the Ethernet device to receive a complete message from the controller.
Send command after successful connectionEnter a First and Second Command to send to the device after a successful connection has been established.
Auth Type Sets the aauthentication type for the device.
Timeout Specifies themaximum time that the device allows for receiving each feedback message from the device before timing out.
URI pathType the part of the WebSocket URI that follows its communication port. For example, if the URI is wss://:31416/Dicentis/API, type /Dicentis/API in this field.
Sub-protocolType the subprotocol for the Ethernet device. This information shall be available in the device's reference or user manual.
ExHeader Type the rerequired data for handshake header.
ExtensionType the required data for the Sec-WebSocket-Extensions header field.
Ωogin Command Setsthe command for logging in to the device.
Parameter Sets the pparameters (keys) of the device that are required for the controller to connect to the device. For example, the device username and password are required when connecting to the device, and the valid values areadminand 123456respectively.
ParameterATEN VK112EU - - Settings - 1
Keep Connection AliveSpecify an interval during which the controller sends the specified command to make sure the it is connected to the Ethernet device.
Automatically reconnect if no return message is receivedCheck this box if you want to continue reconnection attempts when no return message is received from the device.
WSS Select to encryptthe WebSocket connection.
Use Default Click thisbutton to restore to default settings.

- Function List – Use this section to configure the device functions by adding actions to the list.

  • String Format – Use the buttons to select HEX or ASCII. (TCP only)
  • Function – Lists the actions created for a device. A Function name must include an asterisk (*) for each drop menu you add to the Command string. Double-click to edit the function name. The dropdown menu will appear where the (*) is entered in the Function name

- Command – Shows the command string created for the action.

  • To edit a command for a Telnet, PJLINK, ONVIF, or TCP compliant device, double-click the Command field (green area in the interface).
  • To edit a command for an HTTP or HTTPS compliant device, click the Edit button. The Edit HTTP Command window appears.

Edit HTTP(S) Command Type HTTP Method GET URI Command Clear Parameter Command Clear Header Command Clear Body Command Clear Save Cancel

  • Feedback – Stores return messages generated by testing the command strings. Double-click to manually add or remove stored messages. This function is not applicable for ONVIF devices.
  • Send – Click this button to test the command for the function. The return messages can be saved to Feedback.

This screen appears when Send is clicked. Select a controller for the device to connect and configure the fields such as device IP address.

Please select a controller. Intelligent Search Intelligent Search Searches for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP Address Controller ID Model Name IP Address MAC Address Firmware ID-1 VK2100 10.3.41.119 00:10:74:b2:01:74 2.7.262.002 ID-3 VK2100 10.3.41.97 00:10:74:b2:01:99 2.6.253.002 HTTP(S) IP Address Encryption None OK Cancel

Intelligent Search Clickto locate controller without specifying an IP address. This option only searches for controllers on the same local area network. For controllers across a network device, such as a router or switch, you must specify the IP address.
Search by IP address EEnter the IP address and click Search to locate a controller.
Controller ID Use the chcheck box to select the Controller, fill in the IP Address, Username and/or Password and then click OK. Next use the instructions below this table.
Refresh Click this buttonto refresh the Controller ID list.
IP Address Type the IPaddress of the device.
Username Type the device's username.
Password Type the device's password to grant access right to the controller.
Receive message for Sspecifies the maximum allowed time that the device receives messages from the selected controller.

Note: The username and password are not required for UDP and TCP devices, and the username is not required for PJLINK devices.

Testing Commands

After selecting a controller for the device and configure the required settings (if any) in the select controller window, click OK to proceed to test the typed command. The Test Command window appears.

Test Command 1 Send Command Add Speaker to All Speaker List Send to all Send to specific URI: api/speakers Parameter: Header: Body: \x5b (1) \x5d Send TestCommand Cancel

Select which device to send command to by choosing Send to all or Send to specific and then click Send Test Command. This window appears.

Test Command 2 Feedback message Function Feedback Add Speaker to All Speaker List Waiting Add Pause Saved Feedback Message Add feedback.. Save & Exit Cancel

The test results will appear in the yellow area of the window and the feedback messages listed in the Feedback column.

  • Add – Click to save a feedback message in the Saved Feedback message window.
  • Pause / Continue – Click to pause sending/receiving the command/return message.
  • Save & Exit – Save the feedback messages to the list and close the window.

Configuring Queries

You can set up queries to actively monitor parameters of a serial or Ethernet device and store the obtained value into a variable for reuse in a control system project.

Take the example of querying the cumulative number of hours that a projector lamp has been used to be able to estimate the remaining lifespan and plan for replacement in advance.

  1. In Database Generator, click Edit to enter the settings page for the projector.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand ▼ Category Model Type Version EPSON Projector EB Series-test Serial 1.0 Edit ATEN Networked AV InternalTest Serial/Ethermet 1 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM3250 Serial/Ethermet v1.2.116 ATEN Presentation Switch VP1420 Serial/Ethermet V1.1 103

  1. Add a command by clicking and double-click the command column to type the command of requesting for the cumulative lamp usage (hour). Consult the user manual for the device to find out the operation command.

Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet String Format HEX ASCII Function ▲ Command Message Lamp Hour LAMP7x0D1x0A Edit Send

  1. Set up a variable to store the queried value.

a) In the Message column, click Edit. The Edit Messages window appears.
b) Click the Script tab and click +Add Script and name the script.

c) Write up a script to create a variable that stores the requested value, in this case, the cumulative lamp hour.

Edit Messages Feedback Script Read Lamp Hour 1 Edit Script Script Information Query 0.1 Sec Trigger Mode and function vk_parser(input) if input == nil or input == "" then return end for index, hour in string gmatch (s, "LAMP(%?+)") do local index = tonumber(index) projectorInfoTable[index] = {} _G[Projector_TAG_DEFINE_LAMP] = hour end 2 Configure Variable Variable List Name Type Range Default vk_var_... S_ NULL + Add Script Next Save

d) Click Save.

ATEN Library

The ATEN Library can be accessed from the project bar and provides the complete list of hardware devices available in the database. The You can add any device in the ATEN Library to My Library. Once a device is added to My Library, the device settings can be edited as needed.

ATEN Device Library File Edit Library Help Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand▼ Category Model Type Version ZONDA TV ZONDA 1 IR V1.0 ZON Audio Processor ZAC SERIES IR V1.0 ZON Audio Processor ZON 1 IR V1.0 ZENTH SAT SAT1576 IR V1.0 ZENITH NETWORK Set-Top Box CABLE1495 IR V1.0 ZENITH TV 50M88W IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B25A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B25A74R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B25A76R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B27A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B27A74R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B27A76R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B32A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B36A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B50M88W IR V1.0 Add to My Library Cancel

  • Use the check boxes to select devices to add to My Library. Check All to select all devices in the list.
    ◆ Key in word strings then click Search to find a device.
  • Click All, Serial, DO, IR, Relay or Ethernet to filter the device list by type.
  • Click Brand, Category, Model, Type or Version to sort the devices.
  • Click Add to My Library to add the selected devices to My Library.
  • Click Cancel to return to My Library.

Chapter 6

Remote PC Control

Overview

While being capable of controlling serial, IR, I/O, and relay equipment, ATEN controllers also support remote control of computers This control is achieved with a program, ControlAssist, that grants control right to a specified ATEN controller via the network. When a computer is installed with ControlAssist, you can remotely perform the following:

◆ Control PowerPoint slides
- Control media files through Windows Media Player
- Initiate actions on third-party programs using hotkeys that have been defined for the programs
- Perform system control such as shutting down the computer, execute command prompt, set system volume, and run a program

Note: For a full list of supported actions, see Supported PC Control Actions, page 278.

Specifications

◆ Supported computers
- Only Windows-based computers are supported for remote control.
◆ Each computer is deemed as an Ethernet device to the ATEN controller, and therefore follows the specification that each controller can support up to 25 Ethernet devices.

- To use ATEN Viewers on a Windows platform, make sure to install Internet Explorer version 11 or later.

◆ PowerPoint File Control

- ControlAssist only supports PowerPoint files that contain 200 slides or less, and are created using Microsoft Office 2007/2010/2013, or WPS Office.

- ControlAssist only supports the following PowerPoint file formats: pps, ppt, and pptx.

◆ Media File Control

- ControlAssist only supports media files created using Windows Media Player.

- When a media file is remotely enabled and controlled using an ATEN Viewer, the file opens in Windows Media Player and this setting can not be changed.

- If you encounter any issues playing a media file, try install a third-party video codec.

- ControlAssist only supports control of the following media file formats:

Category File Formats
Windows Media format asf, wma, wmv, wm
Windows Media Metafiles asx, was, wvx, wmx, wpl
Microsoft Digital Video Recording dvr-ms
Windows Media Download Package wmd
Audio Visual Interleave avi
Moving Pictures Experts Group mpg, mpeg, m1v, mp2, mpa, mpe, m3u
Musical Instrument Digital Interface mid, midi, rmi
Audio Interchange File Format aif, aifc, aiff
Sun Microsystems and NeXT au, snd
Audio for Windows wav
CD Audio Track cda
Indeo Video Technologyivf
Windows Media Player Skins wms
QuickTime movie filemov
MP4 audio filem4a
MP4 video filemp4, m4v, mp4v, 3g2, 3pg2, 3gp, 3gpp
Windows audio file aac, adt, adts

Setting Up Remote PC Control

Follow the steps below to install the required programs on the target computers, configure the associated controller, and customize the Viewer for remote PC control.

  1. Make sure you have installed Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2015 to the target computer. To download the package, go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=48145
  2. Install ControlAssist on the computer you wish to control. For detailed steps, see Installing ControlAssist on Target Computers, page 269.
  3. Add the computer into the control system. For detailed steps, see Adding Target Computers to the Control System, page 272.
  4. Create a control interface to be used on a licensed mobile device.

- For detailed steps, see Configuring a Control Interface, page 274.

- For details on licenses, see Licenses for Mobile Control, page 77.

Installing ControlAssist on Target Computers

Follow the steps below to install ControlAssist on the computers you wish to control.

  1. Download ControlAssist.

a) Visit the ATEN download page: https://www.aten.com/global/en/products/professional-audiovideo/control-system/controlassist/
b) Search for “VK6000”. A list of downloads for VK6000 appears.
c) Click ControlAssist_Vx.x.xxx.zip to download.

  1. From the downloaded file, double-click ControlAssist_Setup to install the program. An installation wizard appears.
  2. Follow the on-screen instruction to complete the installation.
  3. When the installation is complete, ControlAssist runs in the system tray.

  4. To configure ControlAssist, right-click in the system tray and select Settings. This window appears.

ControlAssist Basic Settings Certification & Private key About ATEN ControlAssist Basic Settings Username admin Password ****** Change Password Port 6277 Session Timeout (seconds) 3600 *The value must be between 30 to 3600. Root Folder %MY_COMPUTER% ATEN Save

Click the Basic Settings, Certification & Private Key, or About ATEN ControlAssist to access the following settings/information.

Control DefaultDescription
Basic SettingsThe settings with which an ATEN controller needs to establish connection with the computer and to gain control right.
Username admin Thecredentials required for an ATEN controller to establish connection with the computer.
Password passwordNote: To change the username and password, make sure to log in the computer using an Administrator account.
Port 6277 The port through which ATEN Configurator establishes connection with the ControlAssist-installed computer.
Session timeout 3600The maximal time allowed for the controller to establish connection with ControlAssist.
Root Folder N/A This field specifies the computer path under which files are display in the PowerPoint Control and Media templates' file list. To display files at the computer's partition level, type %MY_COMPUTER% in this field.
Upload SSL Certificate and Private Key
Upload an SSΩ certificate and its private key to secure sessions between the computer and the connected controller.
Certificate DefaultcertificateClick Choose a file from... to browse for an SSΩ certificate.
Private key Defaultprivate keyClick Choose a file from... to browse for a private key SSΩ certificate.
About ATEN ControlAssist
Version N/A Indicatesthe release version.
Visit Official WebsiteN/A Click to open information.
Note: If the text in the ControlAssist window appears oversized, change the desktop font size to its default, and then log in the computer again to resolve the issue.

Adding Target Computers to the Control System

After you have installed ControlAssist on the computers you wish to control, follow the steps below to establish connection between the controller and the target computers.

  1. From ATEN Configurator, locate and open your project file.

  2. Click the Device tab, and from the Ethernet device type category, click on a blank device or click Add More Devices to add one.

  3. Click Library. This window appears.

ATEN Device Library All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Property Atan Video Switches VS881 V1.0 Atan Video Switches VS481B V1.0.062 Atan Video Splitters VS0102 V1.1.102 Atan Video Splitters VS0104 V1.1.102 Atan Video Splitters VS0108 V1.1.102 Atan Video Splitters VS172 V1.0.065 Atan Video Splitters VS174 V1.0.065 Atan Video Splitters VS1814T V1.1.103 Atan Video Splitters VS1818T V1.1.103 Atan Video Splitters VS1804T V1.1.107 Atan Video Splitters VS1808T V1.1.107 Atan Extenders VE200 V1.0 Atan Extenders VB552 V1.0 Atan Multi View KVM Switche CM1164 V1.1.105 Atan Converters VC1080 V1.3.127 Atan Tool ControlAssist V1.0 HTTPS MATSUI TV TV1057 V1.0 MATSUI TV TV1058 V1.0 MATSUI TV TV1160 V1.0 Add To Project More device drivers

  1. Use the search box to search for "controlassist" to load the ControlAssist database. This screen appears.

ATEN Device Library controlassist All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Aten Tool ControlAssist V1.0 Add To Project More device drivers

  1. Click Add to Project. This computer, identified as an Ethernet device installed with ControlAssist, appears in the Device Configuration List.

VK2100-ID01 Device Configuration VK2100-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Serial 1 VM0404H RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 VM0404H-1 RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 VS0801H RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 VM3404H RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1 I/O 1 None Output Room-1 I/O 2 None Output Room-1 I/O 3 None Output Room-1 I/O 4 None Output Room-1 IR 1 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices IR 2 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices IR 3 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices IR 4 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices Relay 1 None Room-1 Relay 2 None Room-1 Relay 3 None Room-1 Relay 4 None Room-1 Ethernet 1 VM5404D TELNET Room-1 + Add More Devices Ethernet 2 ControlAssist-1 HTTPS Room-1 Remove

  1. Select the newly added device and configure the Properties settings on the right of the interface.

Hint: If you have more than one computers installed with ControlAssist, change the device name to distinguish these PCs.

For details on Properties settings, see Ethernet Device Properties, page 113.

Configuring a Control Interface

Example 1:

Follow the steps below to create a control interface that allows you to browse and play any file from the specified root folder (see page 269) in the target computer. You can follow the same logic for creating a media control page.

  1. In the Design tab, make sure your home page contains a presentation button and the Viewer contains a PowerPoint page.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Controller Viewer Viewer 1 Home Page PowerPoint Media Home Page ATEN Remote PC Control with ATEN ControlAssist PC Control Apps CUSTOM

  1. Configure the button to have it link to the PowerPoint page if pressed in the Viewer.

a) Click the presentation button.
b) Select Link and then double-click the PowerPoint page.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Function Home Page PowerPoint Media Commands Link To: PowerPoint

  1. Configure the PowerPoint page if you did not use a built-in Viewer template.

a) In the left sidebar, click PowerPoint.
b) In the PowerPoint page, right-click any blank spot and select PowerPoint Control Template. A pre-made screen is added.

PowerPoint Properties Help Name: Font: Arial 10 pt Style: Image Transl Passed Transparency Position & Size Position X Y 223 112 Size Width Height 625 534 Float Image Size Select Device ControlAssist Action

c) In the Properties column, use the Select Device drop-down menu to select the PC that stores the PowerPoint files you want to play.

Example 2:

Follow the steps below to create a quick access button for opening and playing a specific PowerPoint file. You can follow the same logic to create a button for opening and playing a specific media file.

ATEN Configurator - [Computex 20170530.vkproj*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help Project 2 Device 1 Design Upload Controlset Viewer iPad activity presentation conference Page1 TV activity presentation conference Presentation Start the presentation with connection control Breakout: switch with project control Control lighting Select menu in Main IV Video Lighting Control ATEN Button Action Device Room-1 FESD0100(LAN) Presentation: PCLAN 2MLumentoOne(LAN) BxBPC86300(LAN) Control:Allian(LAN) Macos Link Set Flag Condition Change Button State. Function [Media Control] Switch Mode mode * [Media Control] Switch Repeat mode * [Media Control] Next * [Media Control] Previous * [Media Control] Close * [Media Control] Open Print List * [Power Point control] Open File * [Power Point control] Start Presentation * [Power Point control] End Presentation * [Power Point control] Close * [Power Point control] Go to Next side. Commands [ControlAssal] or VK2100+DB1 Ethernet (S) ControlLayout(PowerPoint control) Op [ControlAssal] or VK2100+DB1 Ethernet (S) ControlAssal(PowerPoint control) Bte 2a 2b 2c 2d

  1. Create an outlook for the interface.

a) In ATEN Configurator, click the Design tab.
b) Click Add Page and rename the page to "presentation".
c) Customize the interface and add control buttons using the Properties settings in the right-hand column. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 119.

  1. Define the action of each button. For example, for the PowerPoint button to open and start a slide show when pressed, do the following:

a) In the preview pane, click the PowerPoint button.
b) Select ControlAssist (LAN).
c) Double-click [PowerPoint] Open file and then [PowerPoint] Start presentation.
d) Configure the commands and arrange them in the order of execution.

Tip: The asterisk (*) at the end of a Function indicates that it requires configuration in the Commands column.

For details on supported control actions, see Supported PC Control Actions, page 278.

  1. From the Upload tab, deploy and back up the project to the controller. For details, see The Upload Tab, page 237.

Supported PC Control Actions

Command Function
Note: Commands indicated with an asterisk require configuration after being added to the Commands column in the Configurator.
[Media Control]Note: The commands in this group apply to Windows Media Player only.
Close Closes the player.
Next Plays next in the playlist.
Open file* Opens and plays the specified file in Windows Media Player.
Open playlist* Opens and plays the specified playlist in Windows Media Player.
Pause Pauses the playback.
Play Plays the opened file in Windows Media Player.
Previous Plays previous in the playlist.
Set volume to* Sets the player to a specified volume.
Stop Stops the playback.
Switch to full screen mode* Enables or disables the player to full-screen display.
Switch to mute mode* Enables or disables mute mode.
Switch to repeat mode* Enables or disables repeated play.
Volume* Adjusts the player's volume up or down.
[PowerPoint Control]
Open file* Opens the specified PowerPoint file.
Start presentation Starts the slide show of the specified PowerPoint file.
End presentation Ends the slide show of the specified PowerPoint file.
Close Closes the opened PowerPoint file.
Go to next slide* Goes to the next slide.
Go to previous slide Goes to the previous slide.
Go to slide Goes to a specified slide number.
[System Control]
Open file* Opens a specified file saved in the target computer.
Open URΩ* Opens a specified URΩ.
Run program* Runs an application.
Shut down PC Shuts down the computer.
Command Function
Note: Commands indicated with an asterisk require configuration after being added to the Commands column in the Configurator.
Set volume* Adjusts the computer's volume.
Execute Command Prompt*Executes the specified command via Command Prompt.
Bring application to top* Keeps the window of the specified program on top of other windows that are open on the desktop.
[Hotkey Control]
Create action Executes the associated hotkey(s) on the program that opens topmost on the computer desktop.For example, if you have “Ctrl + f” defined as the hotkey for extending a program to full screen in the program itself, to remotely simulate this action, you should have one Create action command associated with two Select key commands, one defined as “Ctrl”, and the other as “f”: ATEN VK112EU - Example 2: - 2
Select key* Use this command to specify the hotkey as defined in the target program. If the hotkey involves pressing two or more keys at the same time, you will have two or more Select key commands associated to one Create action command. See the example in the Create action command above.

Note: Adhere to the following guidelines when specifying file paths:

  • Include the file name and file extension of the target file.
  • Use double backward slashes between folder levels.
  • If the file path contains space, put the file path in double quotations.
  • The following are examples of valid file paths:

"C:\ControlAssist\Presentation.pptx"

"C:\ControlAssist\Presentation Demo.pptx"

This Page Intentionally Ωeft Blank

Chapter 7

ATEN Control System App

Overview

The ATEN Control System App is a platform that allows you to operate your control system using pre-made Viewers on mobile devices with an iOS, Android, or Windows platform.

Requirements

Make sure your mobile device uses a supported version of the mobile operating system listed below before installing the app.

Mobile Operating System Supported Version
iOS 10.0 or later
Android 8.0 or later
Windows 7 or later

Installing the App

To install the ATEN Control System App on a mobile device, do the following:

  1. From the mobile device, tap the App Store or Google Play icon.

ATEN VK112EU - Installing the App - 1

  1. In the search box, type "aten control".

  2. Tap ATEN Control System, and then download and install the app.

  3. The ATEN Control System icon appears on the mobile device. Tap the icon to open the app.

Note: The button sound is enabled by default. To mute button sound, go to Settings of the mobile device, find ATEN Control app and disable the button sound setting.

Demo/Start Screen

When you open the ATEN Control System app for the first time, the demo/start screen appears:

ATEN VK112EU - Demo/Start Screen - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["DEMO"] --> B["FORENC"]
    B --> C["SYSTEM"]
    C --> D["START"]

Tap Demo to try the ATEN Control System app. Tap Start to find a controller and download Viewers (see Overview, page 287).

Note: The default demo/start screen appears until a Viewer is downloaded to the Control System app. After a Viewer is downloaded, the default demo/start screen will reappear only if the app is reinstalled, which will also delete all Viewers.

The Demo page provides two sample Viewers. Tap either one to view the controls of different hardware devices.

To return to the demo/start page, tap Quit Demo at the top right corner.

WELCOME WinViewer 1 Demo

Select a Viewer or press any of the buttons on the Welcome page to demo the app. The first Viewer's name will depend on the OS of the device.

WinViewer1 / iPad / Android1

Conference Projector Screen Lighting

This demo shows a Conference call interface with controls for a Projector, Screen and Lighting. Tap any of the device icons to open each of the following control pages:

Projector VGA HDMI Projector Screen Light

Screen Projector Screen Light

Lighting 1 2 Projector Screen Light

Demo

This demo shows different buttons that can be pressed to control the Projector, Lights, Video Wall and Camera. Tap the icons to view control pages for each device. Tap the Quit Demo icon to return to the previous page, or press on the background until the logout dialog appears.

ATEN

Control Pages

ATEN

ATEN

Add Delete ATEN

ATEN

The images above show control pages for the Projector, Lights, Video Wall and Camera in Demo. Tap the Home icon in the lower left corner to return to the previous page, or press on the background until the logout dialog appears. To return to the demo/start page, tap Quit Demo at the top right corner.

Overview

Welcome (List of Viewers) Page

The Welcome screen is the home screen of the ATEN Control System app. It lists downloaded Viewers and provides administrative options. Tap a Viewer to open the controls for a room (see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 119), or use the administrative options listed below.

WELCOME Viewer1 Moscow_Meetin Change mode

Control Description
ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 2Manage Viewer – Use this page to add, update, and remove downloaded Viewers. See page 288 for details.
ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 3Manage LAN Device – Use this page to access controller's web console or configure the network settings for controllers and the devices that they manage. See page 289 for details.
ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 4Log Report – Use this page to lookup logs to troubleshoot connectivity issues. See page 294 for details.
ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 5Preferences – Use this page to set a password for accessing the app or configure the app's usage settings. See page 295 for details.
ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 6Settings – Use this page to access the system settings page of ATEN Touch Panel. This tab is only accessible when the Control System app is used on an ATEN Touch Panel.
ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 7Information – This page provides information about the ATEN Control System's software version. See page 302 for details.

ATEN VK112EU - Welcome (List of Viewers) Page - 8

Manage Viewer

The Manage Viewer page allows you to add, update, and remove downloaded Viewers. To download Viewers, tap Add Viewer.

Manage Viewer Add Viewer Viewer1 Moscow_Meetin Update Remove Update Remove

Control Description
ATEN VK112EU - Manage Viewer - 2Tap Add Viewer to download Viewers. See page 303 for details.
ATEN VK112EU - Manage Viewer - 3Tap the Information icon to view the MAC Address, IP Address and Controller ID of the controller associated with the Viewer.
Update TapUpdate to connect to the controller and download an updated version of the Viewer. After the update, the “Downloaded Successfully” prompt will appear
Remove TapRemove to delete the Viewer. A dialog box will appear to confirm deletion of the Viewer.Tap Delete to remove the Viewer, or Cancel to cancel the deletion.Note: Viewers are only deleted on the mobile device, and will still be available on the controller.
Done TapDone to return to the Welcome page.

ATEN VK112EU - Manage Viewer - 4

Manage LAN Device

The Manage LAN Device page allows you to edit network settings for the controllers and LAN devices added in the Configurator software

(see Device Library, page 118).

Manage LAN Device Device LAN Device Status VK2100-ID01 Device 10.3.41.85

Control Description
ATEN VK112EU - Manage LAN Device - 2Tap to expand controllers to view connected LAN devices.
ATEN VK112EU - Manage LAN Device - 3Tap to open the web GUI (Chapter 3, Web-Based Configuration and Control).

Depending on the LAN device you select, different options are available. Tap on a device to open the settings page. Use Edit to change settings, Apply to save or OK to exit.

Controller
ATEN VK112EU - Manage LAN Device - 4

ONVIF

ONVIF Edit IP Address 192.168.11.12 Username user 82 Password Done

ONVIF IP Address 192.168.11.12 Username User 82 Password masked** Show Password Apply Cancel

TCP

TCP Device Edit IP Address 192.168.11:12 Port 4352 Done

TCP Device IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Apply Cancel

UDP

UDP Device Edit IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Done

UDP Device IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Apply Cancel

Simulating Viewer Controls with Demo Mode

You can preview Viewers and simulate control actions without connecting to a controller using the demo mode.

  1. To simulate controls of a target Viewer, download the Viewer file.
    For details, see Download Viewer, page 303.

Note: If you wish to use built-in Viewers, skip this step.

  1. Tap the ATEN Control app icon from your mobile device. This screen appears.

WELCOME VKT100

Note: If you have not downloaded any Viewers to the app, a Demo/Start page appears. Tap Demo to use built-in Viewers for the simulation.

  1. Tap Settings . The Preferences page appears.

  2. Tap Enable demo mode to select the setting and tap Set. Demo mode is immediately applied.

  3. Tap to return to the Welcome page.

  4. Tap a Viewer to view and try out its control interface.

- To close the Viewer, long tap any space on the mobile device and click OK in a pop-up dialog box.

- To disable demo mode, close the Viewer and then go to Settings to disable the demo mode setting.

ATEN VK112EU - Simulating Viewer Controls with Demo Mode - 2

ATEN VK112EU - Simulating Viewer Controls with Demo Mode - 3

Log Report

The Log Report page lists information and errors which can be used to troubleshoot issues. Tap and drag the list to scroll through the logs. Tap Back to exit.

Log Report Latest report 2017-05-17 10:20:40:848 [00001022] Loading...

Control Description
ATEN VK112EU - Log Report - 2Tap Save to save the log file.
ATEN VK112EU - Log Report - 3Tap Report History to view saved logs (see page 301).
ATEN VK112EU - Log Report - 4Tap Delete to delete the log information.
ATEN VK112EU - Log Report - 5Tap Back to exit.

ATEN VK112EU - Log Report - 6

Preferences

The Preferences page provides settings for operation preferences of the Control System app, access to Room Booking System, and AppSwitcher.

Preference General Advanced Button Sound disable Seconds to press before exit dialog appears 1 Seconds Screen Mode Always On Mn(s) Enable Password Protection Password Connect to ATEN Control System devices based on the Manage Device IP list Notify me when this app disconnects from the Internet. Show alert messages for Ethernet devices managed by the controller Demo mode Enable physical buttons on the Viewer device. Your device will restart upon applying this setting. Set

General

- Seconds to press before the exit dialog appears: This sets the duration of idle time. When the app idles for the specified duration, an Exit dialog appears to check if the user wants to close the app.

- Screen Mode

Note: This setting only takes effect on Viewer control pages.

  • Screen saver: Select this option to start a screen saver when the mobile device has idled for the specified duration.
    Screen lock: Select this option for the mobile device to lock the screen based on its related setting on the mobile device.
  • Always on: Select this option to have the screen on all the time.

- Enable password protection: To restrict access to app settings and prevent unwanted configuration, enable password authentication for leaving the control pages.

  • Allow keyboard usage when this app is in full screen: Enable this option to allow keyboard operation when the app is in full screen.
  • Notify me when this app disconnects from the Internet: Select this option to notify the user when the app disconnects from the Internet.
  • Connect to ATEN Control System devices based on the Manage Device IP list: Select this option for the app to identify and connect to controllers by IP address instead of the controller ID. This is useful when you create projects by duplication, in which case you do not need to reconfigure the controller ID in each project.
  • Show alert messages for Ethernet devices managed by the controller (only applicable to the iOS version of the app): Enable this setting to receive status notifications for the managed Ethernet devices.
  • Always open viewers in full screen (only applicable to the Windows version of the app): Enable this setting to open Viewers (i.e. control pages, for examples see page 284) in full screen.
  • Show minimize, maximize, and close buttons (only applicable to the Windows version of the app): Enable this setting to show the minimize, maximize, and close buttons at the top-right corner of a Viewer (i.e. control page, for examples see page 284).
  • Enable demo mode: Select this setting to allow viewing of the control pages within the Viewer (with no actual effects) when no controller is connected.
  • Enable physical buttons on Viewer device (only applicable to VK330): To prevent access to physical buttons on the touch panel, disable this setting.

Receiving Room Usage Notifications from ATEN Room Booking System

You can receive notifications of room usage including check-in, check-out, and reservation extension on ATEN Touch Panel / Android mobile device as soon as the action is made.

This feature also requires management and configuration of ATEN Unizon. For more information, see ATEN Unizon User Manual. The Access to RBS control setting merely allows the device to be able to receive notifications from ATEN Unizon.

Allowing Room Usage Notifications

  1. Go to Preferences > Advanced page, enable Access to RBS control to allow ATEN Unizon to send notifications to the mobile device.
  2. (Optional) Enable/disable notification sound.
  3. Tap Set to save the settings. The RBS control icon 📄 appears.

Remote RBS Control

You can check in, check out, or extend meeting reservation using ATEN Touch Panel / Android mobile device.

To allow these remote actions:

  1. Go to Preferences > Advanced.
  2. Enable the Access to RBS Control setting and tap Set.
    The RBS control icon appears.

AppSwitcher

You can maximize the usage of an ATEN Touch Panel (VK330) using AppSwitcher which allows you to install multiple apps (ATEN or third-party apps) on the Touch Panel and to switch apps should your need changes.

Adding Apps to ATEN Touch Panel And AppSwitcher

Follow the procedure below to install apps to an ATEN Touch Panel and to add them to AppSwitcher to make them available for switching.

  1. Go to Preferences > Advanced, enable the Access to app switch setting.

AppSwitcher Access to app switch enable Installed Apps Web browser VE89 Control Email Crestron Add App Remove App

  1. Tap Add App to install an app to the mobile device.
  2. Tap C to refresh the list. The installed apps appear on the list.
  3. To make an app available for switching, tap the app to add it to AppSwitcher. Apps added to AppSwitcher are marked with black icon. Tap again to unselect. You can add multiple apps to AppSwitcher.
  4. Tap Set. The AppSwitcher control icon appears.
  5. To uninstall an app, tap Remove App.

Using AppSwitcher

You can switch among the installed and added apps using AppSwitcher.

  1. On your Viewer, find the AppSwitcher control .

If you can not find the control, go to Preferences > Advanced page, enable the Access to app switch setting, and tap Set. The AppSwitcher control should appear.

  1. Tap . A list of available apps appear.

Information Back to main control RoomBookingSystem Video Presentation Control VM APP Go to Preferences

  1. Tap from the list to switch the control to the selected app.

For example:

VK330 Room Info VP1471 - 604_VP1421 VSPLSS Manually Connect Scan VP Devices

Note: If the app you wish to use is not in the list, tap Go to Preferences, and then make sure the app is installed and added to AppSwitcher. For detailed instructions, see Adding Apps to the Device and AppSwitcher, page 298.

  1. To return to the previous control page, tap Back to main control.

ATEN VK112EU - Using AppSwitcher - 3

Report History

When you tap Report History, you can view and export logs. Saved log files are listed by date in the left column. Tap a log file to view it in the window to the right. Tap and drag the list to scroll through the logs. Tap Back to exit.

Reports Apr 27, 2017 20170427_2.vklog 20170427 11:25 saved 20170427_1.vklog 20170427 11:30 saved Apr 26, 2017 20170426_2.vklog 20170426 15:42 saved 20170426_1.vklog 20170426 15:16 saved 2017-04-26 15:16:25:854 [20020903] Receive QuickAction Feedback 2017-04-26 15:16:25:883 [00020112] Action Feedback : 4261415601 enable 2017-04-26 15:16:26:009 [00000006] Send Quick Action Request to (fe000ab1_press) 2017-04-26 15:16:26:009 [00020910] Send Quick Command 10.3.41.85 Success 2017-04-26 15:16:26:157 [20020903] Receive QuickAction Feedback 2017-04-26 15:16:26:203 [00020112] Action Feedback : 4261415601 enable 2017-04-26 15:16:26:322 [00000006] Send Quick Action Request to (fe000ab1_press) 2017-04-26 15:16:26:322 [00020910] Send Quick Command 10.3.41.85 Success 2017-04-26 15:16:26:491 [20020903] Receive QuickAction Feedback 2017-04-26 15:16:26:492 [00020112] Action Feedback : 4261415601 enable

ATEN VK112EU - Report History - 2

Tap Export to send the log as an e-mail attachment.

ATEN VK112EU - Report History - 3

Information

The Information page displays the ATEN Control System's version.

About ATEN ATEN Control System Version 2.1.207

ATEN VK112EU - Information - 2

Download Viewer

The Download Viewer page allows you to search for controllers and download Viewers. This page is accessed from Welcome→Manage Viewer→Add Viewer.

Download Viewer Profile Search for all controllers on the I Auto Search Search by IP address 000.000.000.000 Please select the viewer profile to download. Add Viewer Use Auto Search or Add IP to add the viewer. Download

Control Description
Search by IP AddressTap to enter a controller's IP address, then tap the Search icon to find it. When controllers are found on the network, they are listed in the Add Viewer box.A Search History drop-down menu will appear for previously searched IP addresses.
Auto Search Auto SSearch allows you to search for controllers without specifying an IP address. The controller must be powered on and connected to the same local network.
Add Viewer This panel lists the controllers that have been found on the network. Each controller lists Viewers that can be downloaded to the mobile device. To upload Viewers to a controller, see The Upload Tab, page 237.
Back Icon Back returns you to the Welcome page.
Download After youselect the Viewers you want to download, click Download to start the process.

ATEN VK112EU - Download Viewer - 2

Downloading Viewers

When controllers are found, they appear in the Add Viewer panel. Check the boxes of the Viewers you would like to download, then tap Download.

Search for all controllers on the I Auto Search Search by IP address 000.000.000.000 Please select the viewer profile to download. VK2100 - ID01 ✓ Viewe:1 | All Rooms ✓ bret | All Rooms Download

Control Description
Add Viewer Themain window lists the controllers that have been found on the network. Under each controller is a list of Viewers with a check box.Use the check boxes to select the Viewers you want to download, then clickDownload.If the Ωock icon appears, you will be prompted to enter the access key.After Viewers download, the “Downloaded Successfully” prompt appears. TapDoneto return to the Welcome page where the Viewers will be listed.Note: After you download a Viewers to the mobile device, the default Welcome screen no longer appears.
Access Key Whenthe a Viewers requires an access key a window appears prompting you to enter the key. Enter the correct access key and then clickOKto download the Viewers from the controller. To set the access key, seeThe Upload Tab, page 237.
ATEN VK112EU - Downloading Viewers - 2Tap the Information icon to view theIP Address, MAC AddressandLicenseinformation of the controller. The license information provides the total number of licenses available and the number in use.

Overview

ATEN expansion boxes support SSH and can be configured via an SSH client such as PuTTY.

Establishing an SSH Session with Expansion Box

  1. On a computer installed under the same network with the target ATEN Expansion Box, install an SSH client, e.g. PuTTY.
  2. Run the SSH client.
  3. Establish an SSH session with the target Expansion Box using the following settings:

♦ Port: 22
◆ IP address of the Expansion Box
- Access key of the Expansion Box

Note: If the session can not be established, log in the Expansion Box's web console to check if the access key needs to be changed.

  1. Execute commands to configure and/or control the expansion box. For more information on commands, see:

◆ Command Syntax, page 306
◆ Command List, page 307

Command Syntax

◆ The general form of a command is:

command parameter {one|two|three}

Notation Description
commandThe name of the command is shown in bold.
parameterIndicates the name of the parameter.
Indicates the name of the value or the information that the user must provide. Only type the information in the angle brackets, not the brackets themselves.
[ ]Indicates optional items. Only type the information in the brackets, not the brackets themselves.
{ }Indicates a set of choices from which the user must choose one. Only type one of the choices in the brackets, not the brackets themselves.
|Indicates two or more mutually exclusive choices in a command line. Only type one of the choices in the command line, not the symbol.

- If you have two or more parameters, the order of these parameters among themselves does not affect the result of the operation. For example, both of the following commands execute the same task:

command name + parameter 1 + parameter 2

command name + parameter 2 + parameter 1

Command List

Configuring Serial Settings

◆ Function

Configure or display ATEN Expansion Boxes' serial settings.

- Syntax

serial [p] [type ] [baud ] [dbit ] [parity ] [sbit ] [fctrl ] [dtype ] [endchar ] [acktimeout ] [control ]

◆ Command & Parameters

Function Command/Parameter Input (argument)
To display current settings for all serial ports when the command is used on its own.serial N/A
To specify the serial port(s) for the command action.p<port number> p01: port1p01, 02: port 1 and 2p*: all portsp: all ports
To specify the type of serial interface.type <serial interface>232, 422, 485
To set the baud rate. baud<buad rate> 300, 600,1200,2400, 4800, 9600,19200, 38400,57600, 115200
To set the databit. dbit<databit> 7, 8
To set the serial parity. parity<parity> none, even, odd
To set the stop bit. sbit<stopbit> 1, 2
To set the flow control. fctrl<flow ctrl> none,hw
To specify the data type (ASCII or HEX).dtype <datatype> ascii, hexNote: If this parameter is not specified, the default setting is ascii.
To set the timeout duration.acktimeoutSpecify the timeout duration in milliseconds.
To specify the end-of-text character.endcharSpecifythe end-of-text character for the connected device.
To display the log of the target port in the specified data format.read N/A
To send data from the specified port.writee.g. “abc123”
To send data from the specified port and request feedback.sendackN/A

Examples

serial: display the current settings for all serial ports

serial p01 type 232 baud 115200 dbit 8 parity none sbit 1 fctrl none: set port 1 to the specified settings.

serial p01, 04, 07 baud 9600: set the baud rate of port 1, 4, and 7 to 9600.

serial p02 dtype hex read: display the log for port 2 in hex format

Configuring Relay Settings

◆ Function

Configure or display ATEN Expansion Boxes' relay settings.

- Syntax

relay [r] [tpulse ] [on|off|pulse|toggle|read]

◆ Command & Parameters

Function Command/Parameter Input (argument)
To display current settings for all relay ports when the command is used on its own.relay N/A
To specify the relay port(s) for the command action.r<port number> r01: port 1r01,02: port 1 and 2r*: all portsr: all ports
To turn the specified relay port(s) on.open N/A
To turn the specified relay port(s) off.close N/A
To turn off one or more relay port(s) for the specified duration.tpulsetpulse 500: turn the relay off for 500 ms and then turn it back on.
To turn the relay port off and then back on.pulse N/A
To change the status of the specified relay port(s), for example, from on to off, or vice versa.toggle N/A
To display settings for the specified relay port(s)read N/A

◆ Examples (full commands)

relay: display the current settings for all relay ports.

relay r*: display current settings for all relay ports.

relay r01 open: Turn relay port 1 on.

relay r01, 04, 07, 12 close: turn port 1, 4, 7 and 12 off.

relay r02 tpulse 500 pulse: turn off port 2 for 500 milliseconds and then turn it back on.

relay r02 read: display the current settings for port 2.

Configuring I/O Settings

◆ Function

Configure or display ATEN Expansion Boxes' digital input/output settings.

- Syntax

io [p] [type ] [lthresh ] [hthresh ] [tpulse ] [high|low|pulse|toggle|read]

◆ Command & Parameters

Function Commandd/Parameter Input (argument)
To display current settings for all digital I/O ports when the command is used on its own.io N/A
To specify the I/O port(s) for the command action.pp01: port 1p01, 02: port 1 and 2p*: all portsp: all ports
To specify the I/O type. typevdc: VDC inputdout: digital outputdry: dry contact
To specify the low-bound voltage threshold.lthreshN/A
To specify the high-bound voltage threshold.hthreshN/A
To specify the duration that the specified port(s) remain disabled.tpulseN/A
Function Commandd/Parameter Input (argument)
To disable the specified port(s) by opening the circuit with a high voltage.open N/A
To enable the specified port(s) by closing the circuit with a low voltage.close N/A
To turn the I/O port(s) off and then back on.pulse N/A
To change the status of the specified digital I/O port(s), for example, from on to off, or vice versa.toggle N/A
To display settings for the specified relay port(s).read N/A

◆ Examples (full commands)

io: display the current settings for all digital I/O ports.

io p*: display current settings for all digital I/O ports.

io p01 type din lthresh 1 hthresh 3: Set the low voltage to 1 and high voltage to 3 for port 1.

io r01, 04, 07, 12 close: Enable port 1, 4, 7, and 12 by closing the circuits of these ports.

io r02 tpulse 500 pulse: turn off port 2 for 500 milliseconds and then turn it back on.

io r02 read: display the current settings of port 2.

This Page Intentionally Ωeft Blank

Appendix

Safety Instructions

General

  • Read all of these instructions. Save them for future reference.
    ◆ Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the device.
  • This product is for indoor use only.
  • Do not place the device on any unstable surface (cart, stand, table, etc.). If the device falls, serious damage will result.
  • Caution: Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Always dispose of used batteries according to the proper instructions.
    ♦ Do not use the device near water.
  • Do not place the device near, or over, radiators or heat registers.
  • The device cabinet is provided with slots and openings to allow for adequate ventilation. To ensure reliable operation, and to protect against overheating, these openings must never be blocked or covered.
  • The device should never be placed on a soft surface (bed, sofa, rug, etc.) as this will block its ventilation openings. Likewise, the device should not be placed in a built-in enclosure unless adequate ventilation has been provided.
    ♦ Never spill liquid of any kind on the device.
  • Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
  • The device should be operated from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company.
  • To prevent damage to your installation it is important that all devices are properly grounded.
  • Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord or cables. Route the power cord and cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over.
  • Position system cables and power cables carefully; Be sure that nothing rests on any cables.
  • Never push objects of any kind into or through cabinet slots. They may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire or electrical shock.

  • Do not attempt to service the device yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

  • If the following conditions occur, unplug the device from the wall outlet and bring it to qualified service personnel for repair.

  • The power cord or plug has become damaged or frayed.
    ♦ Liquid has been spilled into the device.

  • The device has been exposed to rain or water.
  • The device has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged.
  • The device exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
  • The device does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.

- Only adjust those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage that will require extensive work by a qualified technician to repair.

- Avoid circuit overloads. Before connecting equipment to a circuit, know the power supply’s limit and never exceed it. Always review the electrical specifications of a circuit to ensure that you are not creating a dangerous condition or that one doesn’t already exist. Circuit overloads can cause a fire and destroy equipment.

Rack Mount

  • Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack.
  • Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first.
  • Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a device from the rack.
  • Use caution when pressing the device rail release latches and sliding a device into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.
  • After a device is inserted into the rack, carefully extend the rail into a locking position, and then slide the device into the rack.
  • Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating.
  • Make sure that all equipment used on the rack – including power strips and other electrical connectors – is properly grounded.
  • Ensure that proper airflow is provided to devices in the rack.
  • Ensure that the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment does not exceed the maximum ambient temperature specified for the equipment by the manufacturer.
  • Do not step on or stand on any device when servicing other devices in a rack.

Technical Support

International

  • For online technical support – including troubleshooting, documentation, and software updates: http://eservice.aten.com
  • For telephone support, see Telephone Support, page iv:

North America

Email Support support@aten-usa.com
Online Technical SupportTroubleshooting Documentation Software Updateshttps://eservice.aten.com
Telephone Support 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988

When you contact us, please have the following information ready beforehand:

  • Product model number, serial number, and date of purchase.
  • Your computer configuration, including operating system, revision level, expansion cards, and software.
  • Any error messages displayed at the time the error occurred.
  • The sequence of operations that led up to the error.
    ◆ Any other information you feel may be of help.

Specifications

VK0100 VK0200
Interface
Keypad Ωayout Up to 14layout variations using 4 ~ 8 buttonsUp to 125 layout variations using 6 ~ 12 buttons
Serial • 2 x BidirectionalRS-232 Port (2 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)• Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)• Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7• Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2• Parity: None (default), even or odd
Relay • 2 x Relay Channel(2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connector)• Normally open, isolated Relays• Contact Rating: Max 24 VDC, 1A
Digital Input • 1 x DigitalInput Channel (1 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connector);• VDC Mode- Input Voltage Range: 0 to 5 V DC- Programmable Range: 1 to 5 V DC• Dry Contact Mode- Pull-up 2k ohms to + 5 V DC
Ethernet • 1 x RJ-45 FemaleMale, 10/100Base-T• Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH• DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches & Buttons
Controller ID Switch 1 x16-segment Switch
Reset Button 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption DC5 V : 1.1 W : 5 BTUDC 48 V : 1.375 W : 6BTUDC 5 V : 1.15 W : 5 BTUDC 48 V : 1.44 W : 7BTU
Environmental
Operating Temperature0 – 50 °C
Storage Temperature –20 – 60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-Condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Plastic
Weight 0.35 kg (0.77 lb)0.38 kg (0.84 lb)
Dimensions 11.63 x 7.06x 4.84 cm(4.58 x 2.78 x 1.91 in)8.32 x 14.76 x 4.84 cm(3.28 x 5.81 x 1.91 in)
Mobile Control License
No. of free licenses 0
Max. no. of paid licenses10
Note: Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Pad for remote control, one license on the Control Pad will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Pad, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK108US VK112EU
Interface
Keypad Ωayout 4 ~ 8 buttonscustomizable to 14 layouts6 ~ 12 buttonscustomizable to 125 layouts
Ethernet • 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T• Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS• DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches & Buttons
Controller ID Switch 1 x16-segment switch
Keypad ID Switch 1 x 8-segment switch
Reset Button
1 x semi-recessed pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption DC5 V : 1.25 W : 6 BTUDC 48 V : 1.58 W : 7BTUDC 5 V : 1.25 W : 6 BTUPoE: 1.56 W : 7 BTU
Environmental
Operating Temperature0 - 50 °C
Storage Temperature-20 - 60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-Condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Plastic
Weight 0.13 kg (0.29 lb)0.17 kg (0.37 lb)
Device Dimensions 11.63 x 7.06 x 4.84 cm(4.58 x 2.78 x 1.91 in)8.32 x 14.76 x 4.80 cm(3.28 x 5.81 x 1.89 in)
Faceplate Dimensions11.92 x 7.42 x 0.92 cm(4.69 x 2.92 x 0.36 in)8.62 x 15.12 x 0.92 cm(3.39 x 5.95 x 0.36 in)
VK1100A
Memory
SDRAM 512 MB
Flash 8 GB
Interfaces
Serial 1 x ProgrammablebidirectionalRS-232/422/485 port (1 x 5-pole terminal block connector, configurable via pin assignments)◆ Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) or RTS/CTS1 x bidirectional RS-232 port(1 x 3-pole terminal block connector)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd
IR/Serial 2 x ProgrammableIR / UnidirectionalRS-232 Ports (2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
IR:◆ Carrier Frequency: 10 ~ 455 kHz◆ Signal Ωevel: TTΩ (0 ~ 5 V DC)
Serial:◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Signal Ωevel: TTΩ (0 ~ 5 V DC)

VK1100A

I/O 2 x Programmable Digital Input / Output Channels(1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)
Relay4 x Relay Channels (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally Open, Isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC1 x 12 V DC Output Port (1 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A Max
Ethernet2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-TSupported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
Switches
Power 1 x on/off Switch
IR Learning
1 x IR Receiver LED
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton
VK1100A
Power
Power Consumption AC110 V : 4.3 WAC 220 V : 4.5 W
Maximum Input Power Ratinginternal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0-50 °C
Storage Temperature -20-60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.19 kg
Dimensions (Ω x W x H)21.50 x 16.23 x 4.18 cm
Mobile Control License
No. of free licenses 2
Max. no. of licenses 16
Note: The ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 for remote control, one license on the Control Box Gen. 2 will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK1200
System
CPU Quad-core Processor
SD RAM 1 GB
Flash Memory 8 GB
Interface
Serial 1 x Programmable bidirectional RS-232/422/485 port (1 x 5-pole terminal block connector)1 x Programmable bidirectional RS-232 port (1 x 3-pole terminal block connector)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) RTS/CTS (for 5-pole terminal block)
IR/Serial 2 x Programmable IR / Unidirectional RS-232 Ports (2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
I/O 2 x Programmable Digital Input / OutputChannels (1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)
Relay4 x Relay Channels (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally Open, Isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC1 x 12 V DC Output Port (1 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A Max
Ethernet2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-TSupported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
LCD Panel
Size 1.6"
LCM Display 64 x 128 resolution
LCM Setting 3 x Pushbuttons (Up, Down, Enter)
Switches
Power 1 x on/off Switch
IR Learning
1 x IR Receiver ΩED
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption AC 110 V: 4.7 W : 81 BTUAC 220 V : 4.5 W : 81 BTU
Maximum Input Power Rating internal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 – 50 °C
Storage Temperature -20 – 60 °C
Humidity 0 – 80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.23 kg
Dimensions (Ω x W x H) 20.00 x 16.41 x 4.40 cm
Mobile Control License
No, of free licenses 2
Max. no. of licenses 32
Note: The ATEN Control Box comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box for remote control, one license on the Control Box will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK2100A
Memory
SDRAM 1 GB
Flash 8 GB
Interfaces
Serial 2 x ProgrammablebidirectionalRS-232/422/485 ports (2 x 5-pole terminal block connector, configurable via pin assignments)◆ Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) or RTS/CTS4 x bidirectional RS-232 ports(4 x 3-pole terminal block connectors)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd
IR/Serial 4 x ProgrammableIR / UnidirectionalRS-232 Ports (2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
IR:◆ Carrier Frequency: 10 ~ 455 kHz◆ Signal Ωevel: TTΩ (0 ~ 5 V DC)
Serial (Unidirectional RS-232):◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Signal Ωevel: 0 to 5V DC

VK2100A

I/O 4 x Programmable Digital Input / Output Channels(1 x 5-Pole Terminal Block Connector)
Relay◆ 4 x Relay Channels (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)◆ Normally Open, Isolated Relays◆ Contact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC◆ 4 x 12 V DC Output Port (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)◆ Power Supply: 12 V DC, 2 A Max (shared by 4 ports)
Ethernet◆ 2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-T◆ Supported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH◆ DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
Switches
Power 1 x on/off Switch
IR Learning
1 x IR Receiver LED
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton
VK2100A
Power
Power Consumption AC110 V : 5.2 WAC 220 V : 6.5 W
Maximum Input Power Ratinginternal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0-50 °C
Storage Temperature -20-60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 2.64 kg
Dimensions (Ω x W x H)43.72 x 16.32 x 4.40 cm
Mobile Control License
No. of free licenses 2
Max. no. of licenses 16
Note: The ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 for remote control, one license on the Control Box Gen. 2 will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK2200
System
CPU Quad-core Processor
SD RAM 2 GB
Flash Memory 8 GB
Interface
Serial 2 x Bidirectional RS-232/422/485 Ports(2 x 5-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)6 x Programmable Bidirectional RS-232 Ports(6 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) RTS/CTS(for 5-pole terminal block)
IR/Serial 8 x Programmable IR / Unidirectional RS-232Ports (4 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
I/O 8 x Programmable Digital Input / OutputChannels (2 x 5-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
Relay8 x Relay Channels (4 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally Open, Isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC4 x 12 V DC Output Ports (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)Power Supply: 12 V DC, 2 A Max (Shared By 4 Ports)
Ethernet2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-TSupported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
LCD Panel
Size 1.6"
LCM Display 64 x 128 resolution
LCM Setting 3 x Pushbuttons (Up, Down, Enter)
Switches
Power 1 x on/off switch
IR Learning
1 x IR Receiver ΩED
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption AC 1110 V : 5.7 W : 139 BTUAC 220 V : 6.8 W : 144 BTU
Max. Input Power Rating Internal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 – 50 °C
Storage Temperature -20 – 60 °C
Humidity 0 – 80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 2.62 kg
Dimensions (Ω x W x H) 43.24 x 16.32 x 4.40 cm
Mobile Control License
No, of free licenses 2
Max. no. of licenses 32
Note: The ATEN Control Box comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box for remote control, one license on the Control Box will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your ATEN Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK330
Panel Specifications
Display Type TFT-ΩCD
Size 10.1"
Touch Screen Capacitive
Resolution 1280 x 800
Aspect Ratio 16:9
Color Depth 8 bit
Contrast Ratio 800:1
Backlight ΩED
Viewing Angle ±85° (H), ±85° (V)
Interfaces
Ethernet 1 x 4J-45 Female, 10/100/1000 BaseT
USB 1 x USB Type-A
Power
Power over Ethernet (PoE) 802.3 at PoE+
Power Consumption PoE:14W:47.77BTU
Environmental
Operating Temperature0–40 °C
Storage Temperature-10–55 °C
Humidity10–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
HousingABS + PC
Weight0.62 kg (1.37 lb)
Dimensions (Ω x W x H)25.22 x 17.78 x 2.45 cm (9.93 x 7 x 0.96 in.)

VK224

Interfaces

Serial 4 x programmable

e, bi-directional RS-232/422/485

ports (4 x DB9 Male Connector, configurable via pin assignments)

◆ Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)
◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7
♦ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2
♦ Parity: None (default), Even or Odd
◆ Flow Control: None (default) RTS/CTS

RS-232

Pin 2: RX
Pin 3: TX
Pin 5: GND
Pin 7: RTS
Pin 8: CTS

RS-422

◆ Pin 1: RX-
◆ Pin 2: RX+
Pin 3: TX+
◆ Pin 4: TX-
Pin 5: GND

RS-485

◆ Pin 3: D+
◆ Pin 4: D-
◆ Pin 5: GND*

Note: A ground terminal connection is recommended but not required.

Ethernet

◆ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T
- Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH
- DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.

VK224
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A
Power Consumption
DC5V:3.8W:28BTU; DC48V:4.75W:33BTU
Environmental
Operating Temperature0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20–60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.45 kg (0.99 lb)
Dimensions (Ω x W x H)13.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (5.12 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)
VK236
Interfaces
IR/Serial 6 x ProgrammableIR / Uni-directional RS-232 Port6 x 2-Pole Terminal Block ConnectorIR: TTΩ level (0 to 5 V)◆ Carrier Frequency: 10KHz~455KHz;◆ Serial: Uni-directional RS-232 (+ - 5 V)◆ Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even or Odd
Ethernet◆ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T◆ Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH◆ DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A (firmware upgrades only)
Power Consumption
DC5V:1.31W:17BTU; DC48V:1.64W:18BTU
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20–60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.45 kg (0.99 lb)
Dimensions (Ω x W x H) 13.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (5.12 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)
VK248
Interfaces
Relay♦ 8 normally open relays (8 x 2-pole terminal block)♦ Contact Rating: Max 24 VDC, 2A
Ethernet♦ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T♦ Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH♦ DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A (firmware upgrades only)
Power Consumption
DC5V:2.82W:24BTU; DC48V:3.53W:27BTU
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20–60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Power Output
12 VDC, 300mA
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
Dimensions (Ω x W x H) 20.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (7.87 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)
VK258
Interfaces
Relay♦ 8 x Programmable Digital Input / Output Channel♦ Digital Input♦ VDC ModeInput Voltage Range: 0 to 24 VDCProgrammable Range: 1 to 24 VDC♦ Dry Contact ModePull-up 2k ohms to +12 VDC♦ Digital Output: 300 mA sink from 24 VDC
Ethernet♦ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T♦ Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH♦ DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A (firmware upgrades only)
Power
Power Consumption DC5V:2.2W:36BTU; PoE:2.75W:39BTU
Power Output 12 VDC, 300 mA
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20–60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.46 kg (1.01 lb)
Dimensions (Ω x W x H) 13.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (5.12 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)
Control System Project Specifications
Project Elements Maximum Number
Managed IP devicesVK0100 / VK0200 8
VK1100A / VK2100A 25
VK1200 / VK2200 64
Rooms 16
Viewers 32
Macros 1024
Variables 1024
monitoring eventVK0100 / VK0200 10
VK1100A / VK2100A 20
VK1200 / VK2200 40
scheduling event VK1100A / VK2100A60
VK1200 / VK2200
Viewer pages 160 per Viewer
control objects 320 per page
commands 128 per button

CAD Drawings
ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet - 1

ATEN

VK0100

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet - 2

ATEN

VK0100

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet - 3

ATEN

VK0100

Panel Mount Cutout
Width of faceplate = 7.4 cm [2.92"] Height of faceplate = 11.9 cm [4.69"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] 7.2 cm [2.83"] 8.4 cm [3.31"] Cutout Area 1.8 cm [0.71"]

Note: ATEN recommends a 1-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK0100

CAD Drawings
(512cm (595°) 662cm (3.99°) 032cm (0.36°)

ATEN

VK0200

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet - 6

ATEN

VK0200

ATEN VK112EU - Ethernet - 7

ATEN

VK0200

Panel Mount Cutout

Width of faceplate = 15.1 cm [5.95"] Height of faceplate = 8.6 cm [3.39"] 10.1 cm [3.98"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] Cutout Area

Note: ATEN recommends a 2-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK0200

CAD Drawings
ATEN VK112EU - Panel Mount Cutout - 2

ATEN

VK108US

ATEN VK112EU - Panel Mount Cutout - 3

ATEN

VK108US

ATEN VK112EU - Panel Mount Cutout - 4

ATEN

VK108US

Panel Mount Cutout
Width of faceplate = 7.4 cm [2.92"] Height of faceplate = 11.9 cm [4.69"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] 7.2 cm [2.83"] 8.4 cm [3.31"] Cutout Area 1.8 cm [0.71"]

Note: ATEN recommends a 1-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK108US

CAD Drawings

15.12cm (5.95") 6.62cm (1.97) 0.98cm (0.36)

ATEN

VK112EU

ATEN VK112EU - CAD Drawings - 2

ATEN

VK112EU

ATEN VK112EU - CAD Drawings - 3

ATEN

VK112EU

Panel Mount Cutout

Width of faceplate = 15.1 cm [5.95"] Height of faceplate = 8.6 cm [3.39"] 10.1 cm [3.98"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] Cutout Area

Note: ATEN recommends a 2-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK112EU

Datapoint Types

ATEN Control System supports the following KNX Datapoint Types (DPT):

DPT ID DPT Format DPT Name
1.001 B1DPT_Switch
1.002 B1DPT_Bool
1.003 B1DPT_Enable
1.004 B1DPT_Ramp
1.005 B1DPT_Alarm
1.006 B1DPT_BinaryValue
1.007 B1DPT_Step
1.008 B1DPTUpDown
1.009 B1DPT_OpenClose
1.010 B1DPT_Start
1.011 B1DPT_State
1.012 B1DPT_Invert
1.013 B1DPT_DimSendStyle
1.014 B1DPT_InputSource
1.015 B1DPT_Reset
1.016 B1DPT_Ack
1.017 B1DPT_Trigger
1.018 B1DPT_Occupancy
1.019 B1DPT_Window_Door
1.021 B1DPT_ΩogicalFunction
1.022 B1DPT_Scene_AB
1.023 B1DPT_ShutterBlinds_Mode
1.100 B1DPT_Heat/Cool
2.001 B2DPT_Switch_Control
2.002 B2DPT_Bool_Control
2.003 B2DPT_Enable_Control
2.004 B2DPT_Ramp_Control
2.005 B2DPT_Alarm_Control
2.006 B2DPT_BinaryValue_Control
2.007 B2DPT_Step_Control
2.008 B2DPT_Direction1_Control
2.009 B2DPT_Direction2_Control
2.010 B2DPT_Start_Control
2.011 B2DPT_State_Control
2.012 B2DPT_Invert_Control
3.007 B _1U_3 DPT_Control_Dimming
3.008 B _1U_3 DPT_Control_Blinds
4.001 A8DPT_ASCII
4.002 A8DPT_Char_8859_1
5.001 U8DPT_Scaling
5.003 U8DPT_Angle
5.004 U8DPT_Percent_U8
5.005 U8DPT_DecimalFactor
5.006 U8DPT_Tariff
5.010 U8DPT_Value_1_Ucount
6.001 V8DPT_Percent_V8
6.010 V8DPT_Value_1_Count
6.020 B _5N_3 DPT_Status_Mode3
7.013 U16DPT_Brightness
8.011 V16DPT_Rotation_Angle
9.001 F16DPT_Value_Temp
18.001 B _1R_1U_6 DPT_SceneControl
20.100 N8DPT_FuelType
20.101 N8DPT_BurnerType
20.102 N8DPT_HVACMode
20.103 N8DPT_DHWMode
20.104 N8DPT_ΩoadPriority
20.105 N8DPT_HVACContrMode
20.106 N8DPT_HVACEmergMode
20.107 N8DPT_ChangeoverMode
20.108 N8DPT_ValveMode
20.109 N8DPT_DamperMode
20.110 N8DPT_HeaterMode
20.111 N8DPT_FanMode
20.112 N8DPT_MasterSlaveMode
20.113 N8DPT_StatusRoomSetp
23.001 N2DPT_OnOff_Action
23.002 N2DPT_Alarm_Reaction
23.003 N2DPTUpDown_Action
23.102 N2DPT_HVAC_PB_Action

ATEN Control Box Reset Button

The reset button on ATEN Control Boxes can be used to reset system settings as described below.

Reset Button Functions
Control Box ON/OFFOperation Description
ON Short pressResets the Control Box's networksettings.
Press and hold until the front panel ΩEDs blink once, with the buzzer beeping once (about 8 seconds)Resets all settings back to factory default (deleting all Viewers, Projects, and account/password) but retains the network and license settings.
OFF While pressingpressing and holding, turn on the Control Box, and release when the buzzer beeps once, with the front panel ΩEDs blinking.Enters Recovery Mode without resetting the Control Box's settings.
While pressing and holding, turn on the Control Box, and release when the buzzer beeps twice, with the front panel ΩEDs blinking.Resets all settings back to factory default but retains the license settings, and enters Recovery Mode.
While pressing and holding, turn on the Control Box, and release when the buzzer beeps 3 times, with the front panel ΩEDs blinking.Resets all of the Control Box's settings, including Viewers, Projects, account/password, network, and licenses.

Windows OS Button Limitation

There is a limitation for overlapping buttons when adding buttons for a Viewer to be used on Windows mobile devices. When two or more buttons are layered on one another, such as (A) on top of (B), users are unable to press the top most button (A), and instead triggers the bottom button (B) every time trying to press (A). To resolve this issue, copy the top most button (A), and add the duplicate (C) under both (A) and (B) on the Viewer.

MEETING We customized several ATEN classic meeting profile. LIGHT You could control all the lighting area in this war room. PROJECTION Any sources you want to show, just click here to switch. TV WALL You could change the layout of this 4 X 2 video wall. CAMERA Here to check and control the IP-based camera on the ceiling

When the top button (A) is pressed, the lowest button (C) is executed.

ATEN Standard Warranty Policy

Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN warrants its hardware in the country of purchase against flaws in materials and workmanship for a Warranty Period of two [2] years (warranty period may vary in certain regions/countries) commencing on the date of original purchase. This warranty period includes the LCD panel of ATEN LCD KVM switches. Select products are warranted for an additional year (see A+ Warranty for further details). Cables and accessories are not covered by the Standard Warranty.

What is covered by the Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN will provide a repair service, without charge, during the Warranty Period. If a product is detective, ATEN will, at its discretion, have the option to (1) repair said product with new or repaired components, or (2) replace the entire product with an identical product or with a similar product which fulfills the same function as the defective product. Replaced products assume the warranty of the original product for the remaining period or a period of 90 days, whichever is longer. When the products or components are replaced, the replacing articles shall become customer property and the replaced articles shall become the property of ATEN.

To learn more about our warranty policies, please visit our website: http://www.aten.com/global/en/legal/policies/warranty-policy/

© Copyright 2023 ATEN® International Co., Ωtd.

Released: 2023-10-25

ATEN and the ATEN logo are registered trademarks of ATEN International Co., Qtd. All rights reserved. All other brand names and trademarks are the registered property of their respective owners.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : ATEN

Model : VK112EU

Category : Unspecified